JP2020062508A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that adopts the concept of creating a game progressing state advantageous to a player and that can realize further novel game playability.SOLUTION: Provided is a game machine configured to be able to display one operation suggestive image that includes a button display and a gauge display, during a special game and a non-special game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 91

Description

  Regarding gaming machines.

  In recent years, as a pachinko game machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is triggered by a game ball entering the starting opening on the game board surface (gaming area), and if the jackpot lottery is won, a jackpot (special game ) The state is the mainstream Pachinko game machine that can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface and obtain a large number of prize balls. In the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, a probability fluctuation game state that increases the winning probability in the big hit lottery and a time shortening game state that increases the efficiency of symbol fluctuation for notifying the lottery result in the big hit lottery There is also a gaming machine that is provided with the above-mentioned, etc. and enhances the enjoyment of the game by creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player by these gaming states. Then, in order to enhance the effect effect by the sound, there is a game player configured to further enhance the fun of the game by allowing the player to select a music piece to be reproduced by operating the operation member.

JP, 2009-066304, A

  However, since many such game machines have existed in the past, there is a problem that development of a model that realizes more novel game play is desired.

The gaming machine according to this aspect,
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An effect display device (for example, effect display device SG) that displays a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game,
An operating member (for example, a sub-input button SB) operable by a player is provided,
The winning / unwinning lottery is executed based on entering the first starting mouth or the second starting mouth, and having a special game executed by winning the winning / unwinning lottery,
It is possible to display an operation suggestion image indicating that the operation member has a valid operation period on the effect display device,
The operation suggestion image is composed of an operation unit display and an effective period display,
The operation suggestion image can be displayed at both the first timing and the second timing,
At the first timing when the operation suggestion image can be displayed,
When the operation member is operated while the operation suggestion image is being displayed, the operation suggestion image is ended and a new effect display is performed.
The display mode of the effective period display is controlled to change while the operation suggestion image is displayed,
At the second timing when the operation suggestion image can be displayed,
The display mode of the effective period display does not change while the operation suggestion image is displayed,
A game machine characterized in that the operation member can be operated a plurality of times while the operation suggestion image is being displayed, and the effect display can be executed based on the operation of the operation member while the operation suggestion image is being displayed. Is.

  According to the gaming machine of this aspect, it is possible to realize a more novel gaming property in the gaming machine that adopts the concept of creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an operation diagram of the sub input button and the lever in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a channel configuration image diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a main process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the NMI interrupt process (when the power is cut off) on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the counter payout control board transmission control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is an image diagram relating to the prize ball payout command and payout related information on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the counter payout control board reception control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a ball entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main game starting opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the first (second) special winning opening detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the out-port entrance detecting process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is completed. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 32 is a flowchart of the error management process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the firing control signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the management operation control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a display image diagram of the management menu screen in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the power saving mode switching control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the non-gaming period control process on the sub-main controller side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the customization control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the customization guide screen display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a customization guide screen image diagram 1 in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the customization-in-progress display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a customization guide screen image diagram 2 in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of in-game customization control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a music selection process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the big hit medium music selection process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the music selection process during the auxiliary game state on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a music selection screen image diagram 1 (during a big hit) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a music selection screen image diagram 2 (time saving) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a music selection screen image diagram 3 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a music list in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a music transition diagram in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the pending information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the effect operation content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is an effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the button effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the single-shot press effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of continuous hit effect execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of a long press effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 63 is an automatic button operation execution image diagram in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of hidden button effect execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 65 is a hidden button effect image diagram 1 in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of background image display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the electric lamp operation control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 69 is an electric decoration table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the volume control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 71 is a volume determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 72 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the non-gaming period control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the right-hand hitting instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the continuous hit production execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 76 is an example of the display priority applicable to this example. FIG. 77 is a hidden button effect image diagram 2 in the pachinko game machine according to the present example. FIG. 78 is a hidden button effect image diagram 3 in the pachinko game machine according to the present example. FIG. 79 is a hidden button effect image diagram 4 in the pachinko game machine according to the present example. FIG. 80 is a hidden button effect image diagram 5 in the pachinko game machine according to the present example. FIG. 81 is a customization guide screen image diagram 3 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 82 is an example of an automatic continuous hit effect in the pachinko game machine according to the present example. FIG. 83 is a game flow in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. 84 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 85 is a music selection screen image diagram 4 (small hit during short working hours) in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 86 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 90 is a volume transition diagram in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 91 is a usage example of a button image in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment.

Form for carrying out

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. "Entering a ball" includes not only a prize in which prize balls are paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as it can identify the type of information through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, such as numbers, letters, and patterns. And the like. In addition, in the present specification, the "identification information" is sometimes called a main game pattern / special pattern (special drawing) or a decorative pattern (design), but the "special pattern (special drawing)" is a main control board. The display information is identification information controlled by the side, and the "decorative pattern (design)" is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. The "display of identification information" is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission of a light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only light emission but also color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). The “draft” refers to display contents that enhance the interest of the game, and includes, for example, identification information fluctuations / stops, advance notices, moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, and the like. A combination can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in a general big winning opening (so-called attacker) configuration, open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advancing state) and a state retracted in the game board (opposite side to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as a retracted state) In the configuration (so-called Vero-type attacker) that can take the following, the entry state = easy winning state and the withdrawal state = non-winning state. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer) for deciding some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes pseudo random numbers in addition to random numbers in a narrow sense (for example, as random numbers, hard Soft numbers as random numbers and pseudo-random numbers). For example, a so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, a "winning random number (random number for winning / non-winning lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, a variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined. "Variation mode determination random number" to do, "Symbol determination random number" to determine stop symbol, "Hit symbol determination random number" to determine whether to move to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the final identification information, and at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. However, once the entrance (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers including the winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... Is called one random number). . Further, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another type of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state rather than a non-probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability variation game state with high lottery probability, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning in the starting mouth that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting mouth In this case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open probability of the variable member is high, the time of notification of the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short), and the like. “Adjusting the volume level” is to change all the volumes including the maximum volume that can be output. For example, when the maximum volume is changed from “90 dB” to “80 dB” by adjusting the volume level. , The volume that is output in the situation where the volume reaches the maximum volume during super reach production is from "90 dB" to "80 dB", and the volume that is output during variation of the decorative pattern that does not reach variation is "50 dB". From "40 dB" to "40 dB", the maximum volume and the volume other than the maximum volume are changed by adjusting the volume level. “Adjusting the light amount level” means changing all the light amounts including the maximum light amount that can be output. For example, by adjusting the light amount level, the maximum light amount is changed from “brightness 10” to “brightness 7”. In the case of, the light amount in the situation of the maximum light amount such as during super reach production is changed from “brightness 10” to “brightness 7”, and the light amount etc. during the change of the decorative pattern which does not reach reach is changed from “brightness 7” to “brightness”. The maximum light amount and the light amount which is not the maximum light amount are changed by adjusting the light amount level. The "automatic operation state" is a state in which the automatic button operation setting is on, and is a state in which the cut-in effect is executed without operating the sub input button SB or the lever SB-3 during the button effective period. ing. The "non-automatic operation state" is a state in which the automatic button operation setting is off, and the cut-in effect is not executed unless the sub input button SB or the lever SB-3 is operated during the button effective period. There is.

The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko game machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 multifunction machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when it is applied to other game machines (for example, conventional first-class, second-class, third-class, pachinko game machines such as general electric officers). . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, and the like, It is not limited to the following modes. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, modifications to one embodiment should be understood to be modifications of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as the reference table or vice versa. Further, in the present example, the term “table” is not limited to that format, and one or more selection candidates may be selected from the plurality of selection candidates based on one or more information. It should be understood that it is a mode that is associated. Furthermore, the numerical value as a specific example shown in the following embodiments and modified examples (for example, the winning probability at the time of executing the lottery, the maximum number of rounds at the special game, the symbol variation time, the number of continuations in each game state, etc.) is This is merely an example, and particularly under different conditions (for example, the condition of the first main game side and the condition of the second main game side, the condition of the probability variation game and the non-probability variation game, and the time reduction game It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (in terms of conditions such as the time shortening game, etc.) may be appropriately changed unless they largely deviate from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, in the first main game side and the second main game side, the relationship between the winning probability at the time of executing the lottery and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, the size relationship may be changed appropriately such that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring as the number of continuation of the probability variation game state based on the meaning that it continues until the next big hit occurs, is "65535" set as the number of continuation (configured to substantially continue), Alternatively, the probability variation game state is maintained until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of times of continuation, even in the choice of the realization method based on the same purpose, as long as it does not largely deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments or modifications. Should be understood to be appropriately changed.

  Here, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described before describing each component. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board D35. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that is aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably housing the game board D35, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending out the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers D24 are provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the game board D35, and a sound effect according to a game state or the like is output.

  The game board D35 and the transparent plate D16 (for example, glass plate) on the front surface of the game machine are attached to the game machine frame so that they are parallel to each other with a distance (19 mm in this example) exceeding 13 mm and not exceeding 25 mm. Has been. Here, the game board D35 is firmly fixed by a fixing mechanism (not shown) so as not to easily rock.

  In addition, the transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass plate) does not obstruct the view of the entire structure of the game board, and the entire game area is colorless and transparent so that the position of the game ball on the game board can be confirmed. Has been formed.

  The ball plate (for example, the upper plate D20 and the lower plate D22) has the game balls on the ball plate visible to the player (the number of game balls can be generally confirmed), and the game received by the player on the saucer. It has a shape that does not hinder the removal of the ball (a shape that allows the game ball to be taken out freely).

  Next, in the game board D35, a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34 is formed, and a game ball flowing down on the game board D35 (on the game area D30) via the transparent plate D16. The position of can be confirmed. The game area D30 is roughly divided into a left hitting area DL10 and a right hitting area DR10. Then, in the game area D30, a mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and a windmill (not shown) and various general winning holes, a left-handing route ML10, a right-handing route MR10, a first main game starting port A10, and a second main game. Starting opening B10, auxiliary game starting opening H10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol A display device H20, a center decoration D38, a movable body accessory YK, a right general winning opening lamp LP10, a left general winning opening P10, a right general winning opening P20, a sub input button SB, and an out opening D36 are installed. In the present embodiment, the left-handed route ML10 may be referred to as the first downflow route, and the right-handed route MR10 may be referred to as the second downflow route. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  Next, the first main game starting opening A10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting opening A10 includes a first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball Generates mouth entrance information.

  Next, the second main game starting port B10 is installed as a starting winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting port B10 includes a second main game starting port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball Generates mouth entrance information. Next, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is changed to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win the second main game starting opening B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the closed state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a first main game starting opening A10 and a second main game starting opening B10 are provided, and the first game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (left hitting area DL10). While being easily guided to the main game starting port A10, the game ball flowing down the right side (right hitting region DR10) of the game region D30 is configured to be difficult to be guided to the first main game starting port A10. Further, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 are configured to be guided to the second main game starting opening B10.

  In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game starting opening B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game starting opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 are arranged so as to overlap, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starting opening A10 and The main game starting opening B10 may be separated from the main game starting opening B10.

Next, the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting opening entrance detecting device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the auxiliary game start entrance H10, and generates the auxiliary game start entrance ball information that indicates the entrance of the game ball. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10, and the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) The game ball flowing down is configured to be difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball flowing down the right side and the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 may be configured to be guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10.

  Next, the left general winning opening P10 is equipped with a left general winning opening ball detecting device P11s. The left general prize-winning entrance detection device P11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the left general prize-winning hole P10, and generates left general prize-winning entrance information indicating the entrance of the game ball. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the left general winning opening P10. A game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) easily enters the left general winning opening P10, and a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is left. It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the general winning opening P10. That is, when left-handed (when the player hits the game ball by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left-handed region DL10 (left-handed route ML10) on the left side of the game region D30) It is configured so that it is easy to enter the left general winning opening P10.

  Next, the right general winning opening P20 is provided with a right general winning opening detecting device P21s. The right general winning award entrance detecting device P21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the right general award winning entrance P20, and generates the right general award winning entrance information indicating the entry at the time of entering. Here, the right general winning opening P20 is arranged in the right-handed area DR10, and has both the role of the auxiliary game starting opening of obtaining the auxiliary game random number and the role of the general winning opening of paying out prize balls. There is. In other words, the right general winning opening entrance detecting device P21s serves as both an auxiliary game starting opening sensor described later and a general winning opening sensor described later. That is, the entry of the game ball into the right general winning opening P20 serves as a trigger for the lottery for expanding the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d attached to the second main game starting opening B10. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 2 balls) of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the right general winning opening P20. By the way, when a game ball enters the right general winning opening P20, a game ball (for example, 2 balls) paid out as a prize ball from the right general winning opening P20 is obtained by entering the game ball into the left general winning opening P10. , Is smaller than the game balls (for example, 3 balls) paid out as a prize ball from the left general winning opening P10. In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball that has been hit to the right is configured to enter the right general winning opening P20. That is, when a right hit (a right hit area DR10 (right hit route MR10) on the right side of the game area D30 is hit so that the game ball flows down, the shooting strength of the game ball is adjusted to hit the game ball) It is configured so that it is easy to enter the right general winning opening P20.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the entrances that can be entered when performing a right-handed striking, in order from the upstream, “auxiliary game starting opening H10 → right general winning opening P20 → second big winning opening C20 → The order is from the first big winning opening C10 to the second main game starting opening B10 to the out opening D36. Further, since the auxiliary game starting port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that has passed through the auxiliary game starting port H10 will flow further down the game area, and the downstream ball entrance (the above-mentioned right It is possible to enter the general winning opening P20 etc.). On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the right general winning opening P20 will flow into the back side of the game board surface, and then will not enter the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 (execute right striking). Then, the game ball that has not entered the right general winning opening P20 can enter the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20).

  It should be noted that when the left-handed game is executed in the non-time-reduced game state (the game is left-handed in the non-time-reduced game state, the game ball enters the auxiliary game starting opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20). It is difficult to open the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d because it is difficult to play, and as the starting port on the main game side, the game is advanced mainly by entering the first main game starting port A10. At the time of right-handed execution in the time-reduced game state (in the time-reduced game state, the game proceeds by right-handed), the game ball easily enters the auxiliary game starting opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20). 2 main game starting port The electric accessory B11d is easily opened, and the game is advanced mainly by entering the second main game starting port B10 as the starting port on the main game side. Also, rather than the ease of entering the first main game starting opening A10 when the game ball is left-handed in the non-time-reduced game state, the game ball is fired in the right-hand state in the time-reduced game state. It is easier to enter the second main game starting opening B10 if continued to play, in other words, the first main game start when continuing to shoot the game ball by left-handing in the non-time shortening game state. Rather than easiness of entering the ball into the mouth A10 or the second main game starting mouth B10, the first main game starting mouth A10 or the second main game starting when the game ball is continuously shot by right-handing in the time shortening game state The ease of entering the mouth B10 is higher. Therefore, in this example, the number of prize balls (three balls in this example) when entering the left general winning opening P10, which is easier to enter when performing left-handing than when performing right-handing, is determined by right-handing. By designing more than the number of prize balls (two balls in this example) when entering the right general winning opening P20, which is easier to enter when executing than when left-handing, non-time-saving game state The difference in the average number of prize balls paid out by entering the winning opening, that is, the base when the game is left-handed and the game is played when the player is right-handed in the time-reduced game state, that is, the base It is possible to prevent the difference between the values (the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out for the 100 game balls that have been shot in a situation where the special game has not been won) becoming too large.

  Further, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal, an LED, etc., and is configured to be turned on when a game ball enters the right general winning opening during execution of a special game. . Further, it is configured to indicate whether to shift to the probability variation game state or the non-stochastic variation game state after the end of the special game, depending on the lighting color of the right general winning opening lamp LP10. Specifically, it is easy to light red when it becomes a probability variation game state after the end of the special game being executed, and it is lighted blue when it becomes a non-stochastic variation game state after the end of the special game being executed. By configuring easily, it is possible to configure as follows: “Red: High expectation of probability change game state after special game end, Blue: Low expectation of probability change game state after end of special game”. It should be noted that three or more types of lighting colors may be provided as the lighting color of the right general winning opening lamp LP10. The right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be provided in the left hitting area DL10 or the right hitting area DR10 on the game area D30. It may also be provided in a region other than the game region D30. In this example, the non-probability variation game state, normal state, normal game state, normal time, low probability, low probability state, low probability game state, low probability, non-probability variation, low probability lottery state, low probability It may be referred to as medium, normal, low probability, indeterminate change, or the like. Further, the probability variation game state may be referred to as a high probability, a high probability state, a high probability game state, a high probability time, a probability change, a high probability lottery state, a high probability middle, a probability change in progress, or the like. Further, the time-reduced game state may be referred to as a time-saving state, a time-shortening medium, a time-shortening, a high base, a power-supporting state, or the like. In addition, the non-time saving game state may be referred to as a non-time saving state, a non-time saving medium, a non time saving, a low base, a non-electric power support, or the like. Further, the non-probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state may be referred to as a normal state, a normal game state, a normal time, a normal mode, or the like.

  In addition, the game ball flowing down the right-handed route MR10 passes through the right-handed route outlet D50 and flows down to the vicinity of the right general winning opening P20, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20, and the like. It will be.

  Next, in the upper right of the outlet D36, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are provided, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) Before reaching the outlet D36, it is configured so as to easily pass through the region where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged.

  Next, the first big winning opening C10 is in the open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is a big hit symbol and is in a horizontal rectangular shape, and has an outlet port. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of D36. As a specific configuration, the first special winning opening C10 is a first special winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first special winning opening electric prize C11d {and the first big winning. Mouth electric accessory solenoid C13}. Here, the 1st special winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the 1st special winning opening C10, and the 1st big winning opening entering information that indicates that entering the ball. To generate. The first special winning opening electric prize C11d changes the first special winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game balls cannot be won or difficult to win in the first special winning port C10 and an open state in which the game balls can easily win (the first (1) Special winning opening The electric accessory solenoid C13 is excited to be changed). In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape and is a mode in which the game ball can be changed to a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win, It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, Also as a mode (so-called slide attacker) that can take a state where the opening on the passage on which the game ball can roll is a big winning opening and the opening is closed and open (so-called slide attacker) It is often suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second special winning opening C20 is in the open rectangular shape when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped in the jackpot pattern, and forms a horizontal rectangular shape. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the mouth D36. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entrance of the game ball, and the second special winning opening electric prize C21d {and the second big winning Mouth electric accessory solenoid C23}. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry when entering. To generate. And the game ball which entered into the second big winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detecting device C21s. Next, the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is configured such that the second special winning opening C20 is placed in the normal state where the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and the open state where the game ball is easy to win in the second special winning opening C20. Change. In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape and is a mode in which the game ball can be changed to a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, (Bello type attacker) or a mode in which the opening on the passage on which the game ball can roll is a big winning opening and the opening can be closed or open (so-called slide attacker) This is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). Is a device that executes the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g), the first main game It is provided with a symbol holding display section A21h (second main game symbol holding display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, the number of lights of the lamp, the first main game (second main game) It corresponds to the number of reserves of the random number related to (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol that is not executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 types of numbers and "-" that is missing (however, it is not limited to this, and a 7-segment LED is used so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by symbols or the like. In addition, the number of holdings is not limited to the display of four lamps, and the holding number of up to four can be displayed (for example, one lamp is used. Number 1: lighting, hold number 2: low speed blinking, hold number 3: medium speed blinking, hold number 4: high speed blinking).

  Since the main game symbol does not necessarily have a role of rendering, in the present embodiment, the size of the first main game symbol display device A20 is set to an inconspicuous degree. However, in the case of adopting a method in which the main game pattern itself has a directing role and does not display the decorative pattern, the main game pattern is displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG described later. You may comprise.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device for displaying an effect image including a decorative pattern that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 is, for example, a decorative symbol display area SG11 that displays a plurality of rows of moving images of decorative symbol variations simulating a game of a slot machine, a first hold display unit SG12 that displays main game hold information, and It has 2nd reservation display part SG13. Although the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be composed of other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the 1st reservation display part SG12 and the 2nd reservation display part SG13 are each comprised from four lamps, and the said lamp is interlocked with the reservation lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes a display related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display section H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamp corresponds to the number of holding the auxiliary game symbol fluctuations (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations that are not executed). In the present embodiment, as a ball entrance through which the auxiliary game random number can be obtained, there are two ball entrances of an auxiliary game starting hole H10 and a right general prize hole P20, and one of the two ball entrances. Even when the player enters in, the display concerning the acquired auxiliary game random number will be displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as the flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 and / or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of blinking or the like.

  Next, the movable body accessory YK is installed in the vicinity of the effect display device SG, and has a role of driving and enlivening the game when executing the effect accompanying the change in the symbol. It is preferable that the driving is conspicuous by moving in the up-and-down direction, rotationally driving, or illuminating, and it is preferable that the driving is facilitated by a symbol variation with a high expectation of a big hit.

Next, the sub-input button SB is an operation member that is electrically connected to the sub-control board S and that is operated (depressed) to perform an effect based on the operation. The operation modes of the sub input button SB include single-shot pressing (operation mode of pressing the sub input button SB only once in a short time), continuous hitting (operation mode of pressing the sub input button SB multiple times), and long pressing. (
Operation mode in which the sub input button SB is continuously pressed for a predetermined period). Furthermore, the operation member that is electrically connected to the sub-control board S and that is operated (pressed down) to perform an effect based on the operation is not limited to the sub-input button SB. , Cross keys SB-2, which has four operation sections for left, right, and which can be selected by the user to operate the operation section (preliminary effect, etc.), by pulling to the front It is configured to have a lever SB-3 for executing an effect (moving a movable body accessory, etc.).

  Next, the outlet D36 is a ball entrance provided below the game area D30, and a game ball that flows down without entering any of the winning openings provided in the game area D30 enters the ball. When a game ball enters the outlet D36, the lottery based on random numbers, prize balls based on the entered ball are not executed, and the game ball is discharged to the outside of the game machine. Become. In the present embodiment, the out port D36 is provided only at the lowermost part on the game board to enter the game ball that has not won the winning port, but the out port is provided at a predetermined position on the upper part of the game board. It is also possible. In that case, in order to clarify that the entrance is not the winning opening, it is desirable to use a sticker so as not to be confused with the winning opening such as displaying “OUT”.

  Next, the power saving mode indicating lamp (for example, configured by an LED) D70 is configured to light based on whether the power saving mode (details will be described later) is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and particularly controls overall gaming operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting opening A10 (second main game starting opening B10) (that is, the game. Production control means (sub-main control section) for performing display control and the like on the main display control board M for performing a control directly related to a person's profit) and the production display device SG for imparting amusement to game contents. SM, a sub-sub-control unit SS that mainly performs an effect display, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with winning in each winning port, an upper ball plate D20. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 for paying out to, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) of an upper ball plate D20. To area D30 A launching device D42 for launching balls one by one, a launching control board D40 for controlling the launching operation of the launching device D42, a power supply unit E for supplying electric power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine. The power switch Ea and the like are provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

Next, FIG. 3 is an operation diagram of the sub input button SB and the lever SB-3 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub input button SB and the lever SB-3 are arranged on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the sub input button SB and the lever SB-3 are integrally formed so as to be one member. Is configured. First, the operation mode of the sub input button SB will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 7A, the lever SB-3 is housed inside a member forming the upper bowl D20 (referred to as a housed state). Incidentally, the lever SB-3 is in a housed state during most of the game, such as when the main game symbol is stopped. Further, the lever SB-3 is configured not to detect the operation even if it is operated in the housed state (the effect based on the operation is not executed). On the other hand, the sub input button SB can be operated when the lever SB-3 is in the housed state, and the operation can be detected by pressing the sub input button SB. The button effective period in the execution variation of the single button push effect, which will be described later (the later described button single push effect, the button continuous hit effect, the button long press effect, or the hidden button effect, which is the operation of the sub input button SB in the pattern change. By operating the sub input button SB during a period in which is received = a period in which the effect is executed by operating the sub input button SB), the effect based on the operation is executed. The period during which the operation of the lever SB-3 is accepted due to the change in the design for executing the lever effect described later is referred to as the lever effective period.

  Next, the operation mode of the lever SB-3 will be described in detail. The figure (c) is in the same state as the figure (a). In this state, the lever SB-3 cannot be operated, or the effect is not executed even if the lever SB-3 is operated. Next, as shown in FIG. 3D, when the lever effective period (the period during which the operation of the lever SB-3 is effective) in the symbol variation in which the lever effect is executed becomes (timing one second before the lever effective period). Etc.), the lever SB-3 is driven so as to project from the member forming the upper bowl D20 (this state is referred to as a projecting state), and as shown in FIG. When the player is in the protruding state, it is possible to perform an operation of pulling it in the front direction as seen from the player. By pulling the lever SB-3 during the lever effective period in the lever effect, the input of the lever SB-3 is detected, and the effect based on the operation of the lever SB-3 is executed. In addition, the big hit expectation degree of the symbol fluctuation when the lever effect is executed during the symbol change is higher than the big hit expectation degree of the symbol fluctuation when the single button effect is executed during the symbol change. It is desirable to configure it as follows. In addition, it is preferable that the lever effect is more flashy for the player than the single button effect. In addition, as the operation mode of the lever SB-3 during the lever effective period, there are a single pull (operation mode in which the lever SB-3 is pulled only once in a short time) and a continuous pull (operation mode in which the lever SB-3 is pulled multiple times). , And pulling (operating mode in which the lever SB-3 is continuously pulled for a predetermined period). Also, in the lever single-pull effect that is a lever effect that executes a single pull, the lever continuous pull effect that is a lever effect that performs continuous pull, and the lever long-pitch effect that is a lever effect that performs a long pull, the symbol that is being executed You may comprise so that the degree of expectation of a big change may differ.

  Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are arranged on one board) that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S controls the sub-main control section SM for controlling various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub-control unit SS that executes display processing such as variable display / stop display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device SG, and hold display, notice display, and the like. The main control board M, the prize-ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control section SM, and the sub-sub-control section SS have a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a program that prescribes the arithmetic processes of the CPU, and a CPU. A RAM for temporarily storing data (various data generated during a game, a computer program read from a ROM, etc.) handled by is mounted. The schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection mode between each board and device will be outlined below.

First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game starting mouth entrance detecting device A11s, second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s, auxiliary game starting entrance detecting device H11s, 1 big winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detecting device C21s, general winning detecting device (not shown, the general winning opening is a winning opening, but there is no prize lottery }), Drive solenoids (not shown) (the above-described first special winning opening electric auditors solenoid C13, the second special winning entrance electric auditors solenoid C23, etc.), information display LEDs (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to an input / output device that is essential to, and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control section SM / sub-sub control section SS), and based on the progress of the game, the prize-ball payout. It is configured such that information (commands) related to the above can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the production / game progress state and the like can be transmitted to the sub control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M is connected by wiring to the hall computer HC via the external connection terminal. Is configured to output game-related information from an external device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 4, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of two-way communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main board. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player, and receives a request for paying out the game balls to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmitting. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, a control circuit section of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (the launch handle, the launch motor, and the ball feeding device). Etc.) are also connected. In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is separately provided and adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the game ball lending control board KH is used for lending. The control and management control of the recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be centralized.

  Next, the sub-control board S, as described above, the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative pattern, etc., the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, the drive device for the effect of the movable body accessory YK, and the power saving. A mode display lamp D70, a volume switch V10 in which the volume output from the speaker D24 can be changed by operation, and can be operated only by an administrator, and button effects (button single press effect, button continuous hit effect, button length). Press effect, hidden button effect) is configured to change the execution mode of the effect, and by operating the customization in-execution screen, volume control screen, light intensity control screen, etc. The sub input button SB, the cross key SB-2, and the lever SB-3, which are configured to change the settings (details will be described later), It is connected (in this embodiment, the operation member is provided three). The sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are configured so that they can be turned on by pressing them down, and the lever SB-3 is configured so that they can be turned on by pulling the lever to the front side as seen from the player. As described above, the sub input button SB and the lever SB-3 are integrated into one mechanism. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub control board S has the sub main control section SM and the sub sub control section SS, and the sub main control section SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. Is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the configuration is not limited to this (configured as a separate board. Although it may be possible, there is a merit that it is possible to reduce the situation in which noise is mixed in the wiring and the like by constructing the integrated structure). Further, the work sharing in both control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP). Further, an electronic value may be given as the award ball without giving a physical award ball.

Next, various functions of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B,
A predetermined number of prize balls based on payout instructions from the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, auxiliary game peripheral devices H), sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM) related to performance, and main control board M It is connected to the prize ball payout control board KH for performing payout control in a communicable manner. Further, the sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub-control section SS (production display means SS) for performing image production, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), a speaker D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub main control section SM (sub game control means SM), the sub sub control section SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. ROM and RAM, and elements such as CPU used for arithmetic processing. Incidentally, each unit which will be included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (device) will be described.

  The "random number" in the claims and the specification is, for example, "0" to "65535" or "0" to "0" assigned depending on the type of random number (for example, winning random number or variation mode determining random number). This is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "255". Further, the random number need not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, a method of expressing each value in a random number is a method of sequentially expressing a value along a sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears (initial value). ) Is defined by a value having an accidental value (initial value updating method), a combination thereof, and the like.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a first / second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game starting opening electric auditors opening timer MP22t-B for measuring the driving (opening) time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main starting opening B10. is doing. In addition, the pachinko game machine which relates to this execution form has the winning a prize sphere counter MP33c which measures the winning a prize to the 1st large winning a prize mouth C10 and the 2nd large winning a prize mouth C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a time saving counter MP52c capable of counting the time saving. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability variation game (probability variation game state) in which the lottery probability for the special game is higher than that in the normal game, and the variation time of the main game symbol is relatively relative to that in the normal game. A short time shortening game (time shortening game state) or the opening time of the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d is relatively longer than that in the normal game.

Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened as compared with the non-time shortening game (time reduction. function). Furthermore, the winning probability of the auxiliary game symbol becomes a probability variation game state (auxiliary game probability changing function). Furthermore, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened (auxiliary game time shortening function), and the opening extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10 is relatively extended (opening time Extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the time saving number is configured to be subtracted for each variation (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Incidentally, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may have a function of performing a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability varying game or a time-reducing game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time there is a variation in the symbol. Good (so-called, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a falling lottery function).

  Next, the game peripheral device will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral device, the first main game peripheral device A is a peripheral device of the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B is a peripheral device of the second main game side, the first main game side And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, the sub sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is the result of the game, including the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time synchronized form. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A, the first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition of the special game, and the first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stop display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B, the second main game start opening B10 that triggers the transition of the special game, and the second main game symbol display device B20 that can display the stop and change of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first / second main game common peripheral device C is in the closed state during the normal game, and is opened under the predetermined condition during the special game (big hit). And has a second big winning opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H, the second main game starting port of the second main game starting port B10, the auxiliary game starting port H10 that triggers the opening of the electric accessory B11d, and the stop display and the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has a possible auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

  Here, the design variation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the variation time of the decorative symbol.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays the image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so that information can be transmitted, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, the sub game control. It means that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 5 is a channel configuration image diagram. First, a sound reproduction command (for example, a sound number, from the sub main control unit SM or the sub sub control unit SS to the sound control unit SO).
When the channel number to be used) is transmitted, the sound control section SO loads sound data from the sound source ROM into the control register based on the transmitted voice reproduction command (for example, based on the sound number) {for example, , Load the sound data contained in the sound source file (eg, WAV file) corresponding to the sound number}. Here, the sound source ROM stores various kinds of information corresponding to the sound number, as shown in "Sound source ROM data image" (for example, the number of channels that the sound data should occupy (the number of channels simultaneously used)). It is configured such that after all the sound data is reproduced, it is designated whether to return to the beginning and reproduce (presence or absence of loop)}, and the reproduction processing of the sound data can be executed based on these various information. Then, in the reproduction processing of sound data, the loaded digital signal sound data (see "Digital signal image" in the figure) is converted into an analog signal (see "Analog signal image" in the figure) via the DAC. And output to the left speaker SOsL and / or the right speaker SOsR. Further, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of channels and control registers. Since the control register and the left speaker SOsL and the right speaker SOsR are connected to 12 channels each, a total of 24 channels are connected, a monaural output (simultaneous use channel) If the number = 1), a maximum of 24 kinds of sound data can be simultaneously reproduced, and if the stereo output (the number of simultaneously used channels = 2), a maximum of 12 kinds of sound data can be simultaneously reproduced. In the present example, the channels are distributed to correspond to the reproduction of sounds related to channels 0 to 11 = BGM (hereinafter, also referred to as music) from the sub-main control unit SM, notice sound effects, and the like. ~ 23 channels = corresponding to the reproduction of the sound related to the error notification sound from the sub-main control unit SM and the reproduction of the sound from the sub-sub control unit SS (sound corresponding to the animation moving image). ing.

Next, FIG. 6 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the game machine is turned on, the process of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the game machine and performing initial setting (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and resets the power supply unit E (RAM clear). It is determined whether or not the button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the administrator of the game arcade intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears all RAM contents on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control section SM (transmission at that timing). Alternatively, the command may be set at the timing and transmitted in the control command transmitting process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1015. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, in step 1007, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the information indicating that the power supply is normally shut off is not stored in the RAM. If Yes in step 1007, in step 1008, the CPU MC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and the RAM area are stored. Compare with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is accurately backed up in the RAM). To do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1007, that is, if the information indicating that the power supply is normally shut off is stored in the RAM, or if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, The CPU MC of the main control board M acquires various information commands at the time of power interruption which are stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are sent to the sub-main control section SM side. (It may be transmitted at the timing, or a command may be set at the timing and transmitted by the control command transmission process described later), and in step 1014-1, the main control is performed. CPUMC of the board M, the return setting of the solenoid {second main game starting port B10 of the second main game starting port B10 Power off the open or closed state of the special winning opening (for example, the first special winning opening C10, the second special winning opening C20) and the movable piece (for example, a member that allows or hinders the entry into a specific area described later) In order to return to the previous state, it is determined whether or not the solenoid actuation bit is on in the order of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d, the special winning opening, and the movable piece. Then, it is determined that the second main game starting opening / special winning opening / movable piece is open, and the solenoid operating flag is stored in the corresponding address in order to open it again}}, and the processing proceeds to step 1015. In step 1015, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power is normally turned on in the RAM, and proceeds to the processing of step 1016. Next, at step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M triggers an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. 7B. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is set to T) (as a result, FIG. 7B is executed when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached), and the process of step 1018 is performed. After that, various random number update processing is performed. After step 1018, the CPU MC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process performed by the main control board M. The CPU MC of the main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 9B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt at about every 1.5 ms), in step 1000-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the input processing described later. Next, in step 1000-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes various random number updating processes described later. Next, in step 1000-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an initial value updating type random number updating process described later. Next, in step 1000-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an initial value random number updating process described later. Next, in step 1000-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a timer subtraction process described later. Next, in step 1000-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a starting port 2 valid period setting process (a process of setting the valid period of the second main game starting port B10) described later. Next, in step 1000-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a prize monitoring process described later. Next, in step 3000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a prize ball payout command transmission control process described later. In addition, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball is won in each winning opening is four balls for the first main game starting opening A10, one ball for the second main game starting opening B10, the first big winning opening C10 and the second. The large winning opening C20 has 15 balls, the left general winning opening (also sometimes referred to as general winning opening) P10 has 3 balls, and the right general winning opening P20 has 2 balls. It should be noted that these numbers of prize balls paid out are examples, and the number of prize balls paid out is the same when entering the first main game starting port A10 and when entering the second main game starting port B10. Alternatively, the number of payouts of the prize balls may be different when the player has entered the first special winning opening C10 and when the player has entered the second special winning opening C20. In addition, when a game ball enters the left general winning opening P10, a lottery such as a win / loss lottery is not executed, and a predetermined prize ball payout number (three balls in this example) is given to the player. It is configured. When a game ball enters the right general winning opening P20, a random number on the auxiliary game side is acquired, and a predetermined prize ball payout amount (two balls in this example) is given to the player. It is configured. However, the number of prize balls at all the winning openings provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example does not exceed 15 for one prize (ball) and is constant (abnormal) regardless of the gaming state. It is configured so that it is invalidated under circumstances or while an error is occurring), and it is configured so that prize balls are not paid out except for winning, while realizing various game states. The direct game result is summarized in "whether or not the fired game ball wins a predetermined winning opening".

In this example, the specific prize ball payout control process is not the main control board M but the prize ball payout control board K.
Since it is performed in H, it is difficult for the main control board M to manage the progress of the payout control in real time. It may not be possible to get the correct number of prize balls. Therefore, in this example, a retry function at the time of abnormality for paying out the game ball for the prize again (for example, when the game ball wins the first main game starting opening A10 and one game ball is paid out) The power is cut off, and after that, after the power is restored, the remaining three game balls are paid out. Of course, by providing a backup function to the prize ball payout control board KH, it is possible to realize the correct number of prize ball payouts even when such an abnormality occurs. The function may not be provided.

  Next, in step 2000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a ball entrance detection process described later. Next, in step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a later-described auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process. Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric auditors product drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1601, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special winning opening valid period setting process described later. Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1550-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an abnormality detection process described later. Next, in step 1550-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a later-described ball entrance passage time abnormality detection process. Next, in step 1550-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game state display process described later. Next, in step 1550-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a handle state signal inspection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1550-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an outlet monitoring process described later. Next, in step 1550-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an LED output process described later. Next, in step 1900, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a fraud detection information management process described later. Next, in step 1950, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an error management process described later. Next, in step 1550-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a firing control signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a test signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a solenoid output process described later. Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side). Next, in step 3500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an external signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets to permit the generation of the timer interrupt, and returns to the process executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process.

  The input process is a process of determining a signal input to the main control board M from an input device such as a sensor and setting a flag or the like corresponding to the signal. In this example, the input process is performed on the game board surface. Switch (for example, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s, the first big winning entrance detection device C11s, Second prize winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device, etc.), an out ball count switch for detecting a ball entering the out port D36, a disconnection short circuit power source abnormality detection signal, an opening signal (for example, front frame D14, door D18) Etc.), a magnetic detection signal 1 (for example, a detection signal by the magnetic detection sensor 1), a radio wave detection signal, an impact detection signal, a touch state signal, and a magnetic detection signal 2 (for example, a magnetic detection sensor 2). A process of monitoring the input of the detection signal). In this example, for a special input such as a RAM clear switch, the input determination is performed by a process different from the input process.

  The various random number update process is a process of relatively simply updating the random numbers used in the lottery, which has an extremely low influence on the payout (for example, adding a constant), and in the present example, a normal symbol variation pattern random number (For example, the auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number) and the variation pattern random number (for example, variation mode lottery random number) is a process of updating.

  The initial value updating type random number updating process is a process of updating the random numbers used in the lottery in which the influence on the payout occurs to a certain extent (a process different from the various random number updating process described above), and in this example, , Random number per normal symbol (for example, auxiliary game symbol winning random number), normal symbol random number (for example, auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number), special symbol random number (for example, symbol lottery random number), special random number per special symbol, etc. Is a process for updating.

  The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the random number for determining the initial value of the random number updated in the initial value updating type random number updating process used in the lottery in which the influence on the payout occurs to a certain extent. In this example, as an example of the random number to be updated, a normal symbol per initial value random number, a normal symbol initial value random number, a special symbol initial value random number, a special symbol per soft initial value random number, etc. can be exemplified. The initial value random number per normal symbol and the normal symbol initial value random number are the random numbers updated by the initial value random number updating process when configured to have a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers.

  Further, the timer subtraction process is a 2-byte timer (for example, the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product release timer MP22t-B, the special game timer MP34t. , Open time timer, etc.).

  Further, the starting opening 2 effective period setting process is a winning opening that facilitates winning by operating the ordinary electric accessory depending on the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d). (For example, it is a process of setting the valid period of the second main game starting port B10).

  The winning monitoring process is a process of updating the passage counter of the switch, creating a security output request to be output to the external terminal board, and sending a command to be sent to the effect control board.

  The special winning opening valid period setting process is a process of storing the result of the valid period determination of the special winning opening (for example, the first special winning opening C10, the second special winning opening C20). As in the third embodiment to be described later, when the special winning area C22 is configured to have the specific area C22, the special winning opening valid period setting process saves the result of determination of the valid period of the specific area C22. You may.

  Further, the abnormality detection processing is processing for monitoring magnetism, disconnection / short-circuit monitoring, power supply monitoring, radio wave monitoring, glass frame set / open / closed state of frame of game board D35, shock monitoring, and the like. ..

  In addition, with the ball passing time abnormality detection processing, in order to detect the ball passing time abnormality when the game ball enters the various ball inlets (for example, the first main game starting port A10), each switch level Is a process for monitoring the continuous ON time (continuous ON time of the ball entrance sensor).

  Further, the game state display processing, the number of times the special electric auditors continuously operate (the number of execution rounds in the big hit), the error state, the number of operation holding balls of the normal symbol display device (displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20) Of the current auxiliary game holding ball) and the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol display device (current main game holding ball number displayed on the first main game symbol display device A20 or the second main game symbol display device B20) This is a process of making a display request.

  The handle state signal inspection process is a process for monitoring the touch state of the firing handle (for example, the firing handle D44).

  Further, the out-port monitoring process is a process of monitoring the out-port (for example, the out-port D36) in order to create a security output request.

  Further, the LED output processing, the display in the special symbol display device (for example, the display of the first main game symbol in the first main game symbol display device A20, the display of the second main game symbol in the second main game symbol display device B20 , The first main game symbol display device A20 of the first main game side operation reserve ball number display, the second main game symbol display device B20 second main game side operation reserve ball number display), normal symbol display device In (display of auxiliary symbols in the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, display of the number of operation reserve balls on the auxiliary game side in the auxiliary game symbol display device H20), error state display, game state display, separate display (for example, , The situation that should be right-handed, the situation that should be left-handed) and the number of times the special electric auditors operate continuously (display of the number of rounds in the big hit) Performed for initialization of the display is sequentially performs processing control of the LED output to be controlled by the main control board M of the output of the display data.

  Further, the launch control signal output process is a process of outputting a signal for prohibiting or permitting the launch of the game ball, which will be described in detail later.

  The test signal output process is a process of creating a signal to be output to a test device outside the gaming machine and outputting the signal to a corresponding output port.

  Further, the solenoid output processing is for a normal electric auditors object (for example, the second main game starting mouth electric auditors thing B11d) solenoid and a special winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) solenoid. This is a process of outputting output data. In addition, as in the third embodiment described later, a special area C22 is provided in the special winning opening, and a shielding member (upper shielding member C24, lower shielding member C25) that makes it difficult or easy to enter the specific area C22 is provided. When configured, the output data of the movable piece solenoid is output in the solenoid output process.

Next, FIG. 8 is a main flowchart showing the flow of the NMI interrupt processing (when the power is cut off) performed by the main control board M. First, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured so that the power failure signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the power is cut off in the gaming machine, the processing of FIG. Is executed. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is cut off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 1019-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a timer interrupt is in progress. If Yes in step 1019-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1019-2 whether or not the information indicating that the power is normally turned on is stored in the RAM. On the other hand, if No in step 1019-1, the process of step 1019-1 is performed again. If Yes in step 1019-2, in step 1019-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power supply is abnormally cut in the RAM, and proceeds to the next step 1022. On the other hand, if No in step 1019-2, in step 1019-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power supply is normally shut off in the RAM, and in step 1020, the CPU of the main control board M is stored. The CPUMC sets power interruption information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing. The example in which the power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU to execute the power failure processing (FIG. 8) has been described, but the invention is not limited to this, and the power failure signal may be input to a specific input port. It is also possible to set and set the main control board side main process (FIG. 6) or the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) to monitor a specific input port to determine the power interruption and perform the power interruption processing.

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. 7. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes a payout control board transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes a later-described payout control board reception control processing, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2000).

  Next, FIG. 10 shows a flowchart of the counter payment control board transmission control processing according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3105, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout signal is OFF, that is, whether or not the payout is currently executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an unpaid prize ball (a prize ball that has not yet transmitted the prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side). To determine. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an error that is unsuitable for performing prize ball payout. , Out-of-ball error, etc.) has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control substrate M has a prize ball payout command for the number of prize ball payouts corresponding to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the payout process is executed this time (see FIG. 11). ) Is set. Then, in step 3125, the CPUMC of the main control board M erases the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the prize ball payout command set this time, and executes a process of shifting the information thereafter. Next, in step 3130, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the set prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and proceeds to the next processing (antipayment control board reception control processing of step 3200). To do. Even if No in step 3105, step 3110 and step 3115, the process moves to the next process (process in step 3200).

<< Contents of commands and information transmitted / received between the main control board / payout control board >>
Here, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH will be described with reference to FIG. 11. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the present embodiment includes specific information that the command is a prize ball payout command and information about the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed to 1001 (identification information that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of prize balls, for example, 0 (0000) means that there are 0 prize balls, and 15 (1111) means that there are 15 prize balls. .

  Next, the payout related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M will be described. Here, as an example, the payout related information (prize ball payout related information or payout abnormality related information) is a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, payout motor error information. , Prize ball device error information, saucer full tank error, and prize ball payout completion information. Here, although details of each error content will be described later, if the bit corresponding to each error is "0", it means that the error has not occurred, and if the bit is "1", the error is concerned. Is occurring. Bit 0 relates to completion of prize ball payout, "0" means that prize ball payout is completed, and "1" means that prize ball payout is not completed.

Next, FIG. 12 shows a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. First, in step 3205, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout related information has been received. If Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not error information (ball out error, upper plate full tank error, other payout related error) exists in the received payout related information. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on an error flag related to the corresponding error, thereby displaying the error information on the prize ball payout control board KH side on the main control board M side. But manage (unified management). On the other hand, if No in step 3210, in step 3220, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the error flag related to the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Then, in step 3225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the prize-ball payout completion information is included in the received payout-related information. If Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set prize ball payout command (the prize ball payout command related to the current payout completion), and performs the next process (step 2000). Process). Even if No in step 3205 and step 3225, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2000).

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flow chart of the incoming ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. First, in step 2100, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game start opening detection process described below. Next, in step 2200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game starting opening detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2300, the entry determination means executes a first (second) special winning opening entry detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a general winning opening detection processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a discharge ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an out-port entrance detecting process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a prize ball determination process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1100).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game starting opening entrance detection process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game starting opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the auxiliary game starting mouth entrance detection device H11s is the entrance detection time (above that time, the auxiliary game starting entrance entrance detection device H11s). When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is ON for a time longer than the time when it is considered that the auxiliary game starting opening H10 has entered the ball. If Yes in step 2104, in step 2106, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start flag. Next, in step 2108, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game starting opening detection continuation flag, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2110, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the end time of the input from the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device H11s (above that time, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device). When H11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for at least the time when it is considered that the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s has completed passing). If Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game starting opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). Even if No in step 2104 or step 2110, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2200).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main game starting mouth entrance detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game starting opening detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s as the entrance detection time (above that time, the first main opening start entrance). When the ball detection device A11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time it is considered that there is a ball in the first main game starting opening A10). If Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start flag. Next, in step 2210, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game starting opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2211, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c, and proceeds to step 2216.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2212, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the input time from the incoming ball number counter MJ10c for the detection time (the first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s is input for the detection time or more). If it is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s). Next, in step 2214, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game starting opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2215, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the first main game starting opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2216. Even if No in Steps 2204 and 2212, the process proceeds to Step 2216.

  Next, in step 2216, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game starting opening confirmation sensor detects a game ball. In the case of Yes in step 2216, the CPU MC of the main control substrate M adds (increments) 1 to the first main game starting opening confirmation counter value in step 2218, and proceeds to step 2222. Even if No in step 2216, the process proceeds to step 2222.

  Next, in step 2222, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game starting opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination unit MJ11-B inputs from the second main game starting entrance entrance detecting device B11s as the entrance detection time (more than that time, When the second main game starting mouth entrance detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that there is a ball entering the second main game starting mouth B10. If Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag during the second main game starting opening valid period is on. If Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start flag. Next, in step 2228, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the incoming ball number counter value. Next, in step 2230, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game starting opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2240.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2225 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the second main game starting opening B10 is not effective), in step 2231, the CPUMC of the main control board M is 2 It is determined that there is an illegal ball entry in the main game starting port B10, a second main game starting port illegal ball entering command (command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2240. Even if No in step 2224, the process proceeds to step 2240.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2222, in step 2232, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the second main game starting entrance ball detection device B11s is the detection time (above that time, the second main game starting entrance When the ball detection device B11s has not detected the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for at least the time it is considered that the second main game starting opening ball detection device B11s has completed passing). If Yes in step 2232, in step 2234, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the second main game starting opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2238, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game starting opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2240. Even if No in step 2232, the process proceeds to step 2240.

  Next, in step 2240, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the fraudulent detection time (as a normal ball entry) by the first main game starting mouth entrance detecting device A11s (second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s). It is determined whether or not the time is ON for a period of time that exceeds the time that has been set and the time when it is determined that fraud has been made). If Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) main game starting opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 2240, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the first (second) special winning opening detection process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) special winning opening detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s) is the detection time of the incoming ball (the time. As described above, when the entrance detecting device detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that there is a entrance at the entrance. If Yes in step 2304, in step 2305, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag during the first (second) special winning opening valid period is on. If Yes in step 2305, in step 2306, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) special winning opening ball flag. Next, in step 2308, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the incoming ball number counter value. Next, in step 2310, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) special winning opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2320.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2305 (when the entry of the game ball is detected while the entry into the special winning opening is not valid), the CPUMC of the main control board M is illegal in the special winning opening in step 2311. It is determined that there is a special ball entry, a first (second) special winning opening illegal entry command (command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2320. Even if No in step 2304, the process proceeds to step 2320.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2302, in step 2312, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s) is the detection time {the time. As described above, when the first big winning prize winning detecting device C11s (second big winning prize winning detecting device C21s) does not detect the input, the game ball has the first big winning prize winning detecting device C11s (second big winning prize winning). It is determined whether or not it is OFF for more than the time which is considered to have passed the detection device C21s)}. If Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) special winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2318, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) special winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2320. On the other hand, if No in step 2312, the process moves to step 2320.

  Next, in step 2320, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that an input from the first big winning a prize winning detecting device C11s (the second big winning award winning detecting device C21s) is a fraudulent detection time (above that time, the first big Time when it is considered that an illegal entrance into the first special winning opening C10 (the second special winning opening C20) is detected when the winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second special winning opening detection device C21s) detects the input. } It is determined whether or not the above is ON. If Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) special winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). On the other hand, if No in step 2320, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. The general winning opening P10 (the left general winning opening P10 and the right general winning opening P20 may be generically referred to as a general winning opening P10) is paid out by entering a game ball. , A general winning opening entrance detection device P11s (in the present embodiment) that is a ball entrance that does not affect the progress of the game (does not execute the lottery that affects the progress of the game) and is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball. Is a general winning opening entrance detecting device P11s which is a sensor for detecting the entrance of the game ball into the left general winning opening P10 and a general winning opening which is a sensor for detecting the entrance of the gaming ball into the right general winning opening P20. It has two general winning a prize entrance detection devices P11s together with the entrance detection device P11s).

  First, in step 2402, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the general winning a prize entrance detecting device is a detection time of the entrance (the general winning entrance detecting device detects the input. Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that there is a ball in the general winning opening. If Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening entry flag. Next, in step 2408, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the incoming ball number counter value. Next, in step 2410, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2412, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning a prize entrance detecting device is the detecting time of the entrance (more than the time, the general winning a entrance detecting device inputs). If it is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time it is considered that the game ball has passed through the general winning a prize entrance detecting device). If Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2418, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2420. Even if No in steps 2404 and 2412, the process proceeds to step 2420.

  Next, in step 2420, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning award entrance detecting device is a false detection time {if the general winning award entrance detecting device detects the input, the general award winning prize is detected. It is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that an illegal ball has entered the mouth}. If Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500). Even if No in step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms that the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is the ball detection time (when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for a time longer than that time). It is determined whether or not the sensor C90s is ON for more than the time it is considered that a ball has entered. If Yes in step 2504, in step 2506, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2508, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 (increment), and proceeds to step 2520.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the end time of the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s (the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s did not detect the input for the predetermined time or more). In this case, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for a period of time when it is considered that the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s has passed. Yes in step 2510
In this case, in step 2512, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2514, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2520. Even if No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process moves to step 2520.

  Next, in step 2520, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the input from the total ejection confirmation sensor C90s is ON for the fraud detection time or longer. If Yes in step 2520, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge confirmation long-time detection flag in step 2522, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). On the other hand, if No in step 2520, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the out-port entrance detecting process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the out-port detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s is the entrance detection time (the above-mentioned time or more, the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s detects the input. Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time it is considered that there is a ball in the outlet C80. If Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the outlet detection continuation flag, and in step 2608, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the incoming ball number counter value ( Incremented), and the process proceeds to step 2620.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2602, in step 2610, the CPUMC of the main control substrate M detects the time when the input from the out-portion entrance detection device C80s is the detection end time. If not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time it is considered that the game ball has passed through the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s). If Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the outlet detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2615, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the outlet long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, if No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process moves to step 2620.

  Next, in step 2620, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the out-mouth entrance ball detection device C80s is a fraudulent detection time (when the out-mouth entrance ball detection device C80s detects the input for at least the time. , It is determined whether or not it is ON for more than a period of time when it is considered that an illegal ball has been entered into the outlet C80. If Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out-port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2700). On the other hand, if No in step 2620, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2700).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, in step 2702, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. If Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the prize ball payout amount (4 in this example) related to the first main game starting opening A10. to add. Next, in step 2708, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information relating to the number of prize balls paid out) indicating that prize balls related to the first main game starting opening A10 are to be paid out, and step 2712. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2702, the process moves to step 2712.

Next, in step 2712, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the prize ball payout amount (1 in this example) related to the second main game starting opening B10. to add. Next, in step 2718, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information regarding the number of prize balls paid out) indicating that prize balls related to the second main game starting opening B10 are to be paid out, and step 2722. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2712, the process moves to step 2722.

  Next, in step 2722, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) special winning opening entry flag is on. If Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) special winning opening ball flag. Next, in step 2724, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the number of prize balls to be paid out (15 in this example, which is related to the first prize hole C10 (the second prize hole C20). ) Is added. Next, in step 2728, the CPUMC of the main control board M informs that the prize balls associated with the first special winning opening C10 (the second special winning opening C20) are to be paid out (for example, information relating to the number of prize balls paid out). Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732. On the other hand, if No in step 2722, the process moves to step 2732.

  Next, in step 2732, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening entry flag is on. If Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening entry flag. Next, in step 2734, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out related to the general prize hole (in this example, the left general prize hole: 3, the right general prize hole). : 2) is added. Next, in step 2738, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information regarding the number of prize balls paid out) indicating that the prize balls related to the general winning opening are to be paid out, and the next process (step 1100). Process). On the other hand, if No in step 2732, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1100).

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered (inflow, in the case of a gate) the auxiliary game starting opening H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits an auxiliary game start opening ball entry command, which is a command related to entering the auxiliary game starting opening H10, to the sub-main controller SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1110. On the other hand, if No in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the player has entered the right general winning opening P20. If Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the right general winning opening entrance command, which is a command related to the fact that the right general winning opening P20 is entered, to the sub-main controller SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1110. Even if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is the upper limit (for example, four balls). If Yes in step 1110, in step 1112, the CPU MC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1114, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the holding sphere in the form of setting it in the RAM area of the main control board M, together with the information on the number of holdings, and performs the next processing ( The process proceeds to step 1200). Even if No in Steps 1104 and 1110, the process proceeds to the next process (process in Step 1200). Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game starting opening H10 or the right general winning opening P20
It is configured so that a random number on the auxiliary game side can be obtained when the player enters the ball. Further, since the auxiliary game starting port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that enters the auxiliary game starting port H10 (passes through the auxiliary game starting port H10) will continue to flow down the game board surface and start the auxiliary game. While the player can enter a ball entrance (right general prize hole P20, etc.) downstream of the mouth H10, the game ball that entered the right general prize hole P20 flows down into the back of the game board surface, and thereafter It is configured not to enter the entrance. Although details will be described later, even if a game ball enters the auxiliary game starting opening H10 (the game ball passes through the auxiliary game starting opening H10), no prize ball is paid out, but the right general winning opening P20. When a game ball enters, a prize ball is paid out.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory opening flag is off. If Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserve ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag), and also the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H. With reference to the obtained game state of the auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol winning random number based on the holding ball, the stop symbol is determined (for example, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, it is compared with when it is off). Then, a winning symbol is selected with a high probability) and is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPU MC of the main control board M.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of the auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbol "D0, D1, D2" is present, and the stop symbol which is a winning symbol is "D1, D2", which is caused by the stop of each. In the non-time-reducing game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing) and stopped. When the design is “D2”, the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → open for 2.0 seconds, closed) (longest open). Also, at the time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the opening mode is (1 second open → 1 second close → 1 second open → 1 second close → 1 second open → close) When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed). The stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time-reducing game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time-reducing game.

  Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag), the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the holding information recorded in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary. After starting the game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, the variation display of the auxiliary game symbol is started on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H and determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and confirms the stop symbol of the acquired auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. To do. Then, in step 1228, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1230, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “hit” (D1, D2 in this example). If Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the hit pattern on the auxiliary game side, opens (for example, in the case of hit pattern "D1", 1 second open → 1 second closed) → Open for 1 second → Close for 1 second → Open for 1 second → Open mode to be closed, in the case of winning pattern "D2", open for 0.2 seconds, close for 0.8 seconds, open for 5 seconds,) Then, a predetermined time relating to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric accessory is set in the second main game starting opening electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10, and proceeds to step 1242. Even if No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242. In the present embodiment, when the main game short-time flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2), the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is kept open for the longest time. Has been done.

  Next, at step 1242, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening timer MP22t-B and determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the opening time of the electric auditors object has been reached. To judge. If Yes in step 1242, in steps 1244 and 1246, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second main game starting opening electric auditors product B11d, turns off the electric auditors open flag, and performs the next process. The process proceeds to (processing of step 1300).

  If No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in steps 1206, 1224, 1230 and 1242, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, immediately after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing a branch process using a stop display fixed flag and a timer). Achievable). In addition, there may be a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers, auxiliary game symbol winning random number for determining the success or failure of the auxiliary game, auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number for determining the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, auxiliary game symbol It may be provided with an auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number or the like for determining the variation time of.

In addition, although not shown, in the second opening operation of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d (opening operation based on the stop of the symbol per auxiliary game once), the game to the second main game starting port B10 Even when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are entered, the opening operation of the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d is configured to be finished, that is, the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag ON). In the case of), the opening (longest opening) of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol "D2" is executed, "0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → The opening time of “open for 4 seconds → closed” ends, or during the opening period of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d, the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls are the second main game starting opening B10. When you enter, whichever comes first, Opening of the second main game start hole electric won game B11d (opening period) is configured to terminate. In addition, in the case of non-time shortening game state (auxiliary gaming time shortening flag off), if the opening (longest opening) of the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol "D2" is executed, The opening time of "open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → open for 2.0 seconds → close" ends, or during the opening period of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, the predetermined number (for example, When the game ball of (10 balls) enters the second main game starting opening B10, whichever comes first, the opening (opening period) of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is configured to end. ing. Further, the total time during which the ordinary electric auditors' character is opened at the longest opening time (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "D2") in the time shortening game state (auxiliary gaming time shortening flag ON) is 4.2 seconds, and In the time shortened game state (auxiliary gaming time short flag off), the total time during which the normal electric accessory is open at the longest opening time (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "D2") is 2.2 seconds. Even in the state, it is configured so that the maximum opening time of one time does not exceed 6 seconds, and the maximum winning number in operation does not exceed about 10 in each game state (time shortening game state. Or whether it is a non-time reduction game state).

  In addition, in this example, when the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that has actuated the operation of the normal electric accessory (the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) is confirmed and displayed in a hit mode, immediately (for example, It is configured to operate within 500 ms, which is shorter than the shortest symbol fluctuation time in the gaming machine), and it is possible to clearly associate with which trigger the normal electric auditors product is operating. In addition, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from winning during the closing operation of the ordinary electric auditors product (the second main game starting port electric auditors member B11d) (during the operation of opening → closing) The drive source (solenoid) is selected so that the object (the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) returns to the inactive state in a short time, and the game ball wins more than necessary and the ball comes out. It is designed so that it does not differ significantly from the design.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it has received the first main game starting mouth entrance information from the first main game starting entrance detecting device A11s of the first main game starting mouth A10. judge. If Yes in step 1302, in step 1303, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a first main game starting opening entry command, which is a command related to entering the first main game starting opening A10, to the sub-main control section SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999, and the process proceeds to step 1304. Next, in step 1304, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls relating to the main game (particularly, the first main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, 4). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPU MC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning / non-winning lottery random number for determining the win / loss, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for performing are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (holding generation command) indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired to the sub-main control section SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999).

  In addition, the winning / winning lottery random number may be configured by one random number, or may be a random number generated by two or more random numbers. As a random number generated by two or more random numbers, a CPU built-in random number that is updated based on the CPU clock or an external clock and a soft random number per special symbol (main game symbol) that is updated by a timer interrupt process are provided. The result of calculating (for example, adding) may be used.

Next, in step 1312, the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game starting mouth entrance information from the second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s of the second main starting mouth B10. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the holding balls related to the main game (especially the second main game side) are within the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers, that is, the winning / missing lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode random number are acquired, as in the first main game side. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the win / loss lot number for the first main game and the win / loss lot number for the second main game) Are set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired (holding generation command) to the sub-main control section SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Note that if No in steps 1302 and 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312, and if No in steps 1312 and 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M, and confirms whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserve ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the reserve ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the retention of the first main game symbol) It is configured to give priority to executing the second main game symbol holding digest, but it is not limited to this (holding digest based on winning order or both main game symbols in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery in which the lottery is selectively performed).

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing), which is related to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since the processing is substantially the same as the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is operating), and the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, if a fixed fixed time (after the fixed display of the main game symbol is displayed, the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed) is provided, during the fixed fixed time, the variation start condition of the next variation May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the CPU MC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the first main game content determination random number related to the present symbol variation ( The second main game content determination random number) is read out, deleted from the RAM area of the main control board M, and the remaining temporarily stored information is shifted (holding digest processing). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 1 corresponding to each game state, and determines the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, Based on the winning lottery random number), the main game symbol winning / winning lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 26 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game win / loss lottery table (second main game win / loss lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability varying gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table), and the main game symbol winning / winning lottery result and the first Based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number), a stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

  Here, FIG. 26 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B") One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined by referring to the main game symbol is 4 rounds for 4A, 4B, 5A, 5B and 10 rounds for 7A, 7B. It should be noted that the random number value and the type of the stop symbol are also merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. You may}.

  Next, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table) corresponding to each game state, and the main game symbol. The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the winning / absence lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, variation mode random number), and these are determined as the RAM area of the main control board M. Is temporarily stored in and the process proceeds to step 1414.

  Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 26 is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in this figure, in the present embodiment, based on the winning / winning lottery result of the main game symbol, the main game time saving flag state, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol for a certain random number value can be determined Has been done. For example, if the winning / winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit with respect to a certain random number value, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is likely to be determined, and the main game shortened flag is on (time reduction In the gaming state), the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short is easily determined. Note that this example is merely an example, and there is no limitation on the type of variation mode (variation time), the selection rate, or the like. Also, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time shortening game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be a relatively long time {symbol variation on the second main game side. When it is configured to be advantageous for the player to be executed, the second main game side is likely to be held by decreasing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (which is advantageous for the player. It is particularly effective when the starting opening on the first main gaming side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side cannot be separated for the purpose of constructing a situation}.

Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the command (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, variation mode information, etc.) relating to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control substrate M, and A command relating to the current game state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (by the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub-main control unit SM side Sent to). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), according to the variation mode stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1420.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

  Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends information (symbol fixed display instruction command) indicating that the variation of the symbol ends, to the command transmission for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) stop the variable display of the main game symbol, and display control the stop symbol stored in the RAM area of the main control board M as the fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

  Next, in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1440, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the conditional device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, in step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1420, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1506, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability variation flag is off. If Yes in step 1506, in step 1510, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1514, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1600). Even if No in step 1506, step 1510, or step 1514, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1600). In this way, in this example, it is configured to transmit the remaining time saving number (the remaining number of symbol fluctuations that will end the time shortening game state depending on the number of symbol fluctuation endings after the end of the special game) to the sub-control board S. Has been done.

Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game shift permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1607, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1608, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets information (special game start display instruction command) indicating that the special game is started in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the routine proceeds to step 1612.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1602, in step 1610, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, if Yes in step 1610, the process moves to step 1612. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1610, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the special game permission has not been given, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1601).

  Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is immediately before the start of each round. If Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the set open pattern (for example, the open pattern that continues to open, the pattern that opens and closes multiple times) is set. Next, in step 1616, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first special winning opening electric prize C11d (or the second special winning opening electric prize C21d) of the first special winning opening C10 to make the first big prize. The winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened, and the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processes of steps 1614 to 1620.

  Next, in step 1622, the CPU MC of the main control board M transmits a game state command related to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds or the number of winning game balls) to the sub-main control unit SM side. To the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (in the control command transmission process of step 1999, it is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines the predetermined number (eg, the second winning hole C20) of the first winning hole C10 (or the second winning hole C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there are 10 winning balls. If Yes in step 1624, the process moves to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer), and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) for opening the special winning opening. ) Has elapsed. If Yes in step 1626, the process moves to step 1628. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1626, the process shifts to the next process (process of step 1601).

Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first special winning opening electric prize C11d of the first special winning entrance C10 (or the second special winning entrance electric prize C21d of the second special winning entrance C20). Is stopped and the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU MC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in Step 1633, the CP of the main control board M is
The UMC adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, it is determined whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) has exceeded the maximum round number). If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1638, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information indicating that the special game is to be ended (special game end display instruction command) to the sub-main control section SM side. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, in a step 1650, a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, is executed, and the process shifts to the next process (the process of step 1601). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1601).

  In this example, the maximum winning number of game balls set as a program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set as 10, and when the maximum winning number is reached, Controls to close the big winning opening (eg, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) immediately to prevent the winning of the game balls exceeding the maximum number of winnings, while Even if the maximum number of winnings is exceeded due to an unforeseen situation such as the game ball temporarily stopping between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the winning hole, under the prescribed conditions (within the prescribed period after closing) Only, the winnings exceeding the maximum winning number are processed as valid winnings.

  More specifically, when the first big winning opening C10 is opened in the first round of the big hit, and when a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of winnings are made in the first big winning opening C10 in the first round, Although one round will be over, in the situation where nine game balls have entered the first big winning opening C10 in the first round, the tenth and 11th balls entered the first big winning opening C10. Even when the number of game balls exceeds the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) that will end the first round due to the occurrence of the ball entry at substantially the same time, It is configured to pay out the prize balls by making the winning effective. On the other hand, the drive mechanism (solenoid and drive transmission mechanism) and the opening / closing part (door, etc.) of the special winning opening perform closing processing and the real winning opening in real time so as to prevent excessive winning (winning exceeding the maximum number of winnings). Is closed, and the structural design and electric design are made so that a plurality of game balls do not stay in the opening / closing member and its vicinity immediately before the closing operation. Thereby, it is configured so as not to be disadvantageous to the player while preventing the game performance from deviating from the payout design value.

  In addition, the maximum opening time set as a program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set to be 30 seconds or less through one unit game, and it is large before the maximum opening time elapses. When the number of winning game balls to the winning opening reaches the maximum winning number, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed immediately, and after the maximum opening time, the winning of the playing ball is blocked while the ball is Even if the player wins after the maximum opening time due to an unforeseen situation, such as (the game ball temporarily stops between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the special winning opening), under certain conditions (after closing) Only within a predetermined period), the prize is processed as a valid prize.

More specifically, as a mode of opening the special winning opening when executing one round in the big hit, "15 seconds open → 2 seconds closed → depending on the type of big hit and the number of unit games (execution round number) Any one of a plurality of operation patterns such as “14.5 seconds open → closed” and “29.5 seconds open → closed” can be set. The total open time is 30 seconds or less, the maximum opening time (29.5 seconds) of the special winning opening has passed in one round, and the game ball is being closed during the closing of the special winning opening. Even if the player has entered the ball, the prize is valid and the prize ball is paid out within the valid period (about 1000 ms after the completion of the closing process of the special winning opening). On the other hand, the driving mechanism (solenoid and drive transmission mechanism) and the opening / closing part (door etc.) of the special winning opening are closed and the big winning opening is closed in real time so as to prevent the winning after the maximum opening time has passed. However, the structural design and electric design are performed so that the plurality of game balls do not stay in the opening / closing member and its vicinity immediately before the closing operation. Thereby, it is configured so as not to be disadvantageous to the player while preventing the game performance from deviating from the payout design value.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stop symbol of the main game symbol, the probability variation big hit symbol (is a big hit symbol that will be moved to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game, in this example, " 5A / 7A / 5B / 7B "). If Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag, and proceeds to step 1656. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1652 (in this example, the non-probability variation big hit symbol which is a big hit symbol which is to shift to the non-stochastic variation game state after the special game is a stop symbol, and in this example, "4A 4B "), the process proceeds to step 1656. Next, in step 1656, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the hour / hour count in the hour / hour count counter MP52c in accordance with the game state and the stop symbol. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1660, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1601).

  Also, in this example, the electric support game state (the time such as opening the winning opening related to the ordinary electric auditors, the time until opening, the number of times of opening, etc. and the ordinary electric auditors only operate based on the end of the big hit. It is a state that changes the probability that the combination of symbols that will be displayed will be displayed so that winning can be facilitated, and may be referred to as a time-reduced game state or an auxiliary game time-reduced game state.) The state, except during the probability change of the special symbol (in the case of probability change game state), the main game symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times, 6 times) determined by the game state and the stop symbol. Until (until the fluctuation of the main game symbol for the predetermined number of times ends). In addition, the number of game balls to be won together with the winning of the other winning holes is approximately the same as the number of game balls fired (the payout rate does not exceed 1), or less than that. The payout performance in the state (arrangement of each winning opening, the operation contents of the ordinary electric auditors, the probability of hitting the auxiliary game pattern, etc. is designed), and the payout performance in the electric support game state is the big hit performance. It is designed to be no higher than. With this configuration, the game relating to the main game symbol and the game relating to the auxiliary game symbol become the master-slave relationship in the game, and the game is not complicated more than necessary.

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short time flag / auxiliary game short time flag). Next, in step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game shift permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1550-1). Even if No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-1).

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the fraud detection information management process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1902, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is continuously ON for a predetermined number of times (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). This is the process executed in step 1. and is intended to remove the influence of noise by determining whether or not it is continuously turned on after a predetermined number of interrupts. The same meaning is said when the term is “predetermined number of times consecutively”). If Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that an illegal radio wave has been detected, turns on the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, in step 1906, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is OFF a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of the illegal radio wave is completed, turns off the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. Even if No in step 1906, the process proceeds to step 1912.

  Next, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. If Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that illegal magnetism is detected, turns on the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1912, in step 1916, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of the illegal magnetism is completed, turns off the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. Even if No in step 1916, the process proceeds to step 1922.

  Next, in step 1922, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. If Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns on the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. On the other hand, if No in step 1922, in step 1926, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether the input from the door opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1926, in step 1928 the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns off the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. Even if No in step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

  Next, in step 1932, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. If Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, turns on the frame opening flag, and proceeds to step 1950. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1932, in step 1936, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether the input from the frame opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1936, in step 1938, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, turns off the frame opening flag, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1950). . Even if No in step 1936, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950).

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the error management process according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error occurrence condition is satisfied. If Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) relating to the fact that an error has occurred and error type information (control command of step 1990). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the transmission process). Next, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error cancellation condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) related to the information indicating that the error is released (control command transmission process of step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550-7). Even if No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1550-7).

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the firing control signal output process according to the subroutine of step 1550-7 in FIG. First, in step 1550-7-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates a payout control board (sometimes referred to as a prize ball payout control board KH), a communication state (BIT0), and a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality (BIT1). Get the error flag. BIT0 indicating the communication state indicates normal if "00000000B" and abnormal if "00000001B". In BIT1 indicating a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality, "00000000B" indicates normality and "00000010B" indicates abnormality. Next, in step 1550-7-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the logical product of the error flag acquired in step 1550-7-1 and the determination data (“00000011B”). Next, in step 1550-7-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the firing permission signal bit data. For example, BIT5 of the output port indicates a firing permission signal, and "00000000B" indicates an error (abnormality), and "0010000B" indicates normality. Next, in step 1550-7-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs to the output port and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1550-8). Here, for the output port, for example, BIT0 is digit 1-bit data, BIT1 is digit 2-bit data, BIT2 is digit 3-bit data, BIT3 is digit 4-bit data, BIT4 is digit 5-bit data, and BIT5 is firing enable signal bit data. , BIT6 are configured as effect strobe bit data, and BIT7 is configured as a security bit.

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, in step 3502, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the game state temporary storage means MB to confirm the state of the game machine. Next, in step 3504, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and, based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, sends it to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550-11).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output through the external relay terminal board G according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of signal output). On the external relay terminal board G, a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminal parts to which various cable connectors are connected (for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning or winning of symbols, current game state (normal game state, Specific game state, special game state etc.) output terminal for game state information output, error information for outputting various error information detected by opening detection sensor etc. when the door is open Output terminals and the like} are provided. Then, as will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are configured to be capable of outputting information from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC by being connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout related information which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. Output terminals other than the one output terminal are terminals for outputting a signal output from the main control board M. For example, a jackpot output terminal that outputs a signal during a jackpot during jackpot (there are a plurality of jacks depending on the type of jackpot). ), A door opening output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door is open, a starting opening winning time output terminal that outputs a signal when the winning opening is won, and there is a shortage of balls in the prize ball tank KT Output terminal of the game related information, which is important information for the amusement hall operator side, such as the output terminal when the ball is out, which outputs the signal between the balls, and the output terminal for the number of special symbol determination that outputs the signal when the special symbol is fixed It is a terminal for. That is, by using the output terminal of the payout related information as one output terminal, it is possible to avoid exhaustion of the output terminals of these important game related information.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to send the game-related information and the payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. There is. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

  Here, the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal board. The G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is configured by a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always in conduction. It does not mean that That is, an electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being replaced by a physical signal (a binary logic signal in which the switch state is ON / OFF) by the section, the signal is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the generated magnetic force brings the contact portion G2 into a closed state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are electrically connected. Further, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are not electrically connected. Therefore, on the side of the hall computer HC, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal that is substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G by detecting the period of continuity. With such a configuration, it is possible to physically secure one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC, and from the hall computer HC side to the main control board M and This prevents a goto action (so-called remote operation goto) that illegally operates the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, the mechanism using the relay coil is configured to enable the one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing the goto action, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pair of light emitting units and One-way communication is also possible by a photosensor having a light receiving unit (for example, light from a light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is connected to the hall computer HC to receive light). It is possible to receive a signal by reading with a section).

  However, since the physical signal (switch state is turned on / off) is once replaced, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC by one of the external relay terminal boards G. It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input / output terminal, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the special symbol determination frequency, It is customary to configure such that only the information indicating that "one variation of the special symbol has ended" can be transmitted).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 70, control processing executed on the sub-main control section SM side will be described. First, FIG. 35 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 10A is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM which is executed after resetting when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2002, the CPU SC of the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear). When information is received-> RAM on the sub side is initialized, when various information commands are received-> Performance related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the RAM on the sub side). Next, in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets the volume level and the light amount level to default values, and turns off the automatic button flag. In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the volume level, the light amount level, and the automatic button operation setting (when the automatic button setting is turned on, the same effect as when the operation member is operated without operating the operation member is provided. It is configured so that the player can set (change) and that when the power is turned "off → on", the player is concerned with the previous settings (settings changed by the player and settings changed by the administrator). Configured to default value. The default values according to the present example are that the volume level is “volume switch large → 5, medium → 1, small → 4”, the light amount level is “medium”, and the automatic button operation setting is “off” (default). Setting to the value is sometimes referred to as the default setting). Next, in step 2050, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a management operation control process, which will be described later. The dB when the volume is set to the default setting is "95" when the volume switch is large, "85" when the volume switch is in the middle, and "82" when the volume switch is small. Even in the case of the default setting, the relationship of “dB of large volume switch> dB of volume switch> dB of small volume switch” is maintained. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned “off → on”, the volume level, the light amount level, and the automatic button operation setting are set to the default settings, but the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the switching off, the volume level, light level, and automatic button operation settings remain as they were before the power was turned off. By executing RAM clear, the volume level, light level, and automatic button operation settings are set to the default settings. It may be configured to. After that, the process shifts to the loop process of repeatedly executing (b) which is the iterative process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, the CPUSC of the sub control board S first executes a non-gaming period control process, which will be described later, in step 2150, as shown in the process of FIG. Next, in step 3600, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a customization control process described later. Next, in step 3700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a music selection process described later. Next, in step 3800, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a pending information management process described later. Next, in step 3900, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 4000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 4400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a background image display process described later. Next, in step 4500, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes an illumination lamp operation control process described later. Next, in step 3250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a volume control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the display command transmission control processing (transmits the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), and ends this repetitive processing routine. To do.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub-main side routine (S2150 to S2999) is looped after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 7C is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when the NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2005, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the command input port from the main control board M side (described above). Check the input port of the data signal line. Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area of the sub main control section SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before the main interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the management operation control process according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, in step 2052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the display condition of the management menu screen (in this example, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button). The display condition of the management menu screen is not limited to the condition of this example, and there is no problem even if the condition is changed so that only the administrator can operate it. For example, it cannot be operated unless the door D18 is opened. A switch may be provided and power-on may be performed as a display condition of the management menu screen while pressing the switch and the RAM clear button, or power-on may be displayed while pressing the sub input button SB and the RAM clear button on the management menu screen. It may be a display condition. The management menu screen may be displayed when the sub-input button SB is pressed while the door D18 is open. In such a case, the door D18 closes. In the state in which the sub input button SB is pressed, the customization execution screen (menu screen that can be operated by the player) is displayed, and in the state in which the door D18 is open, the sub input button SB is pressed to manage. A menu screen (a menu screen that can be operated by the administrator) will be displayed. When the sub-input button SB is pressed, the sub-control board S (sub-side) determines whether to display the menu screen that can be operated by the player or the menu screen that can be operated by the administrator. (1) When the door D18 is opened, a door opening command is transmitted to the sub side, and the sub control board S detects the operation of the sub input button SB when the door opening command is not received and the game is played. A menu screen that can be operated by a person is displayed, and when the operation of the sub input button SB is detected when the door opening command is received, a menu screen that can be operated by the administrator is displayed. (2) The door D18 is opened When the door open flag is turned on, the sub-control board S displays a menu screen that can be operated by the player when the operation of the sub input button SB is detected when the door open flag is off. Shown, the administrator detects an operation of the sub input button SB to display the available operation menu screen when the door opening flag is on, it may be configured to. It should be noted that while the door is open, the sound related to the door open error is always output, and the volume related to the door open error is a constant volume (85 dB in this example) regardless of the state of the volume switch and the volume level. Has become. If Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the management menu screen (see FIG. 37) on the forefront of the display area SG10. Next, in step 2056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated while selecting "setting of actual machine" on the management menu screen. If Yes in step 2056, in step 2058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the management menu screen and displays the setting screen of the actual machine on the forefront of the display area SG10. In the present embodiment, when the sub-input button is operated while selecting "setting of actual device" on the management menu screen, the management menu screen is deleted and the setting screen of the actual device is displayed. Not limited to this, if you operate the sub-input button while selecting "Setting of actual device" on the management menu screen, the management menu screen is displayed on the rear layer and the setting screen of the actual device is displayed on the front layer. That is, both the management menu screen and the actual device setting screen may be displayed. Next, in step 2060, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether the volume control function is on or off based on the operation of the sub input button SB with the cross key SB-2. It should be noted that there is no problem if the setting other than on / off of the volume control function (for example, automatic button operation setting) can be changed, but the setting of the light intensity control function is used to prevent epilepsy (a type of chronic brain disease). It is preferable that the player cannot configure the setting (off setting) that cannot be adjusted by the player. Next, in step 2062, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the volume control function is turned off. If Yes in step 2062, in step 2064, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the volume adjustment prevention flag (if the flag is on, the player cannot execute volume adjustment), and the next The process shifts (loop process of the sub-main side routine). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2062, in other words, when the volume adjustment function is determined to be turned on, in step 2066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the volume adjustment prohibition flag and executes the next process (sub-main side). Routine loop processing).

  In addition, in the case of No in step 2056, in step 2068, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated while selecting “set power saving mode” on the management menu screen. If Yes in step 2068, in step 4100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a power-saving mode switching control process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (loop process of the sub-main side routine). On the other hand, if No in step 2068, in step 2070, the CPU SC of the sub control board S displays the management menu screen based on the operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2. Next, in step 2072, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the setting of the gaming machine based on the operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2, and the next process (loop process of the sub main side routine) Move to. Even if No in step 2052, the process proceeds to the next process (loop process of the sub-main side routine). When the volume adjustment prohibition flag is turned on (when the administrator sets the volume adjustment to be impossible), the volume level is configured to be fixed at the default setting described above in step 2004. There is. If the volume adjustment function is turned off by the management menu, that is, if the volume adjustment prohibition flag is turned on, the volume cannot be adjusted unless the volume adjustment function is turned on again by the management menu. It is configured to continue. As for the configuration related to the management menu, (1) when an error occurs, the volume and the light amount both have predetermined values (the maximum volume and the maximum light amount may be set) based on the error regardless of the setting of the management menu. ) Measurement of meal break time (away time), over-winning sound, custom logo color, menu used for factory inspection, etc. are also possible. (3) Adjustable volume and adjustable light intensity Can be individually set (whether the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted at the same time by one operation), (4) from the production mode A, the production mode B, and the production mode C It may be configured such that the effect tendency can be set, for example, by making it possible to select the effect mode (the occurrence frequency of a specific effect is different when the effect mode is different). As a specific example of the configuration relating to the measurement of the meal break time (leaving time) described above, (1) when the "break time" mark is selected and the "start" mark is determined by the sub-input button, (Measurement) starts, (2) When the time reaches a predetermined time, it can be notified by a sound output from the effect display device SG, the game effect lamp D26, the speaker D24, or the like. (3) The predetermined time can be set. Yes, it can be set between 10 minutes and 60 minutes, and (4) the time may be cleared when the power is cut off during the predetermined time. In addition, the over-winning sound is a winning of a game ball to the special winning opening, which is a trigger for closing the special winning opening, which is the predetermined number in step 1624 described above, during the execution of a certain round (end timing of the running round). It is a sound that is output when the number of gaming balls exceeds the number of winning holes, and the over-winning sound can be selected from a plurality of types, and silent (no effect) can also be selected. Further, the above-mentioned logo is a mark indicating the name of the company that created the gaming machine, and is displayed on the special game end demo time, which is the period after the end of the final round in the big hit, and the standby demo screen. In addition, it is possible to change the logo color and logo shape by customizing the logo color.

Next, FIG. 37 is a display image diagram of a management menu screen according to the present embodiment. First, the image diagram on the left side is an image displaying a management menu, and shows an example of displaying items that can be set by the administrator (not set by the player). In this example, it is possible to set the actual machine, reset the date and time, initialize the elapsed days, and set the power saving mode. This management menu screen is displayed by turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear button in the power-off state. On the management menu screen, each setting item can be selected by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 (in this example, "setting of actual device" is selected), and the sub-input button The setting item can be determined by pressing SB. After completion of each setting, the setting can be completed by moving the cursor to the "setting completed" at the bottom and pressing the sub input button SB. Note that the method of terminating the management menu screen is not limited to this, and the management menu screen may be configured to be terminated by deciding to change various settings in “setting of actual machine” or the like. In each menu, if the setting item is decided by pressing the sub input button SB, the decided setting can be made even if the display of the management menu screen is not finished by pressing the sub input button SB at "end of setting". Is executed and is configured to be stored. For example, after setting the volume control function to off (unadjustable), turn off the power or enter the main game start opening when the management menu screen is displayed. Even if the display of the menu is completed, the decided settings are reflected. Further, the setting is not limited to this, and the determined setting may not be reflected unless the display of the management menu screen is ended by pressing the sub-input button SB at the “setting end”. In addition, when an error occurs while displaying the management menu (for example, an illegal prize error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected at the special winning opening without being in a big hit), the management menu The screen display and the audio output due to the error occurrence may be configured to be executed while maintaining the display. When configured in this way, the screen display due to an error has a higher display priority than the display of the management menu screen, so the screen display due to an error has a higher priority than the display of the management menu screen. Is displayed in. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when an error occurs during the display of the management menu, the display of the management menu may be deleted and a screen associated with the error occurrence may be displayed.

  Next, the image diagram on the right side shows an example of the display screen when the “setting of the actual machine” is selected. In this example, the "volume control function" can be set, and each setting item can be selected by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 ("volume control function" is selected. By operating the left / right button of the cross key SB-2, the function can be switched on / off. It should be noted that when "on" is determined, the volume adjustment prohibition flag is turned off, and when "off" is determined, the volume adjustment prohibition flag is turned on. It should be noted that for the event 2, the event 3, and the event 4, an item that can be set as appropriate may be provided, and for example, the “automatic button operation setting” may be turned on / off. In the present embodiment, the function of "light amount adjustment" is always effective in consideration of epilepsy prevention, etc., and it is configured so that ON / OFF cannot be selected. It should be noted that the "light intensity adjustment" function may be configured to be able to be turned on / off, but in such a case, the default value of the light intensity is not set to the maximum value. When the function is turned off, the light amount is preferably set to a value other than the maximum value.

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the power-saving mode switching control process according to the subroutine of step 4100 in FIG. First, in step 4102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the management menu screen and displays the setting screen of the actual machine on the forefront of the display area SG10. Next, in step 4104, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether to turn on or off the power saving mode based on the operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2. Next, in step 4106, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power saving mode is determined to be ON. If Yes in step 4106, in step 4108 the CPU SC of the sub control board S sets the power saving mode to ON. Next, in step 4110, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets green (the display color when the power saving mode is on) as the display color of the power saving mode display lamp D70, and proceeds to step 4116. Further, in the case of No in step 4106, in other words, when the power saving mode is determined to be off, the CPU SC of the sub control board S sets the power saving mode to off in step 4112. Next, in step 4114, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets red (display color when the power saving mode is off) as the display color of the power saving mode display lamp D70, and proceeds to step 4116. Next, in step 4116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on whether the power saving mode is turned on or off, displays a confirmation message (for example, when the power saving mode is turned on, “power saving operation mode is turned on. Message) is displayed on the display area SG10 for a predetermined period, and the process proceeds to the next process (loop process of the sub-main side routine).

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the non-gaming period control processing related to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 has been detected. If Yes in step 2152, the process moves to step 2158. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation is newly started. If Yes in step 2154, the process moves to step 2158. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2154, in step 2156, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new main game suspension has occurred. If Yes in step 2156, the process moves to step 2158. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2156, in step 2157 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is a big hit. If Yes in step 2157, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the non-gaming period has ended, and counts the non-gaming period measuring timer HY10t (measures the period in the non-gaming state, step 2164, step). 3618, step 4225, and increment timer starting at step 4048) are stopped and reset. In this example, the decorative design is stopped, and is configured to determine the non-gaming state when there is no hold (the decorative design is stopped after the end of the big hit Also, the state where there is no hold is also a non-gaming state). Next, in step 2160, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the standby demo screen, the power saving screen, the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, the customization execution screen, the light intensity adjustment screen, and the volume adjustment screen (each screen). The display image and role of will be described later) are erased. Next, in step 2162, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the display of the screen during power saving is erased. If Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the CPU SC of the sub control board S starts the non-gaming period measurement timer HY10t (increment timer), and shifts to the next process (process of step 3600). Note that in the case of No in step 2157, it is determined that the non-gaming state has not ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3600) without executing the processes of steps 2158 to 2164. Also, if No in step 2162, the process moves to the next process (process in step 3600). As described above, in the present embodiment, the standby demo screen, the power saving screen, the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, the customization execution screen, the light intensity adjustment screen, and the volume adjustment screen are displayed during the big hit execution. Although it is configured not to be displayed, and in the same figure, the process of step 2158 and step 2164 is continued to be executed during the execution of the big hit, the present invention is not limited to this, and step 2156 is performed at the start of the big hit. The processing of step 2160 may be executed, and the non-gaming period measuring timer HY10t may not be timed during the execution of the big hit.

Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the customization control process according to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. First, in step 3600-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is not currently in a big hit or is not in a time saving (time shortening game state), in other words, a big hit is not being executed, and non- It is determined whether or not it is a time saving (non-time shortening game state). If Yes in step 3600-1, in step 3601, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power saving screen is currently being displayed. If Yes in step 3601, in step 3602, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines that the non-gaming period measurement timer value is the first guide value (the timer value at which the first customized guide screen is displayed, and in this example, 5). Second)) or more. If Yes in step 3602, in step 3604, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the first customization guide screen on the forefront of the display area SG10. In this example, the player is configured to change the volume level, light level, and automatic button operation setting (these may be collectively referred to as gaming machine customization), and the gaming machine customization is executed. The display for notifying the transition condition of the screen to be displayed is called a customization guide screen. Note that the customization guide screen has a two-stage display mode depending on the non-game period, and since the non-game period can be displayed in a short time, the first customization guide screen → the second customization guide screen. The mode for notifying the transition condition of the screen for executing the gaming machine customization is not limited to this. (1) Display the first customization guide screen at the timing when the non-gaming period measurement timer value becomes 5 seconds. Without, the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are turned on (the lamps provided on the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are turned on), and the timing when the non-game period measurement timer value becomes 75 seconds The second customization guide screen is displayed at, (2) Sub-input at the timing when the non-game period is started (the non-game period measurement timer value = 0 and the measurement of the non-game period measurement timer HY10t is started) The button SB and the cross key SB-2 may be lighted. Next, in step 3650, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a customization guide screen display control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 4200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a customization-in-progress display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3606. In addition, in the case of No in step 3602, in step 4250, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes in-game customization control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3606. As described above, in this embodiment, the first customization screen is displayed 5 seconds after the non-gaming period starts, and even if the sub input button SB is operated before 5 seconds have passed. It is configured not to be able to change the automatic button operation settings, volume level or light level via the customize screen (It is possible to change the automatic button operation settings, volume level or light level without going through the customize screen. Is). Note that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and until the non-game period starts, 5 seconds elapse, regardless of whether the customized screen is used or not, automatic button operation setting, volume level or light level change It may be configured so that it is not possible. The customization guide screen may be displayed even during the time saving, and the volume, light intensity, and automatic button operation settings may be customized. If the time is saving, the sub input button SB (or the cross key The configuration may be such that the light amount can be customized only when the operation of SB-2) is performed (volume and automatic button operation settings can be performed even during changes).

Next, in step 3606, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the non-game period measurement timer value is equal to or greater than the default setting value (900 seconds in this example). If Yes in step 3606, in step 3608, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns off the automatic button flag. Next, in step 3610, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the volume switch V10 is “large”. If Yes in step 3610, in step 3612, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets the volume level to the default value (“5” in this example), and proceeds to step 3614. If the answer is No in step 3610, the volume level is not set to the default value, and the process proceeds to step 3614. Next, in step 3614, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power saving mode is currently on. In the case of Yes in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPU SC of the sub control board S displays the screen during power saving and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 3700). In this way, when the power saving screen is displayed, the result in step 3601 is No, and the display control process for the customization in-execution screen and the like described later is not executed. If the display conditions of the power saving screen are satisfied while the customization screen etc. is displayed, the displayed customization in progress screen etc. will be deleted (the power saving screen is displayed in the front layer). And, the customization in progress screen may be displayed on the rear layer). On the other hand, if No in step 3614, in step 3618 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S resets and starts the non-gaming period measurement timer HY10t (increment timer), and shifts to the next process (process of step 3700). .. Even if No in Step 3600-1, Step 3601, and Step 3606, the process proceeds to the next process (process in Step 3700). Here, in this example, when the non-gaming period reaches the default setting value of 900 seconds or more, the automatic button operation setting and the volume level can be changed to the default setting. Regarding the volume level, the volume switch V10 Only when is "large", the default setting due to the non-game time elapses can be executed. That is, with regard to the default setting of the volume level, when the power is turned "off → on", the volume level becomes the default value when the volume switch is "high / medium / low" (default setting). On the other hand, when the non-game period has passed for 900 seconds, the volume level becomes the default value only when the volume switch is “high”, and the volume switch is “medium / small”. Is configured so that the volume level does not become the default value (default setting is not executed). Further, when the power saving mode is on, all the gaming machine customization is configured to be unexecutable, and although not shown, the power saving mode is turned off (for example, by operating the sub input button SB. If it is turned off, the game machine customization becomes possible and the fact that the game machine customization becomes possible is notified (for example, the first customization guide at the timing when the power saving mode is turned off). Screen is displayed).

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the customization guide screen display control processing related to the subroutine of step 3650 in FIG. First, in step 3652, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. The cross key SB-2 has four buttons that can be operated: an upper button, a lower button, a right button, and a left button. If Yes in step 3652, in step 3655, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is displaying the customization guide screen (the first customization guide screen and the second customization guide screen are collectively referred to as the customization guide screen). Or not. If Yes in step 3655, in step 3656, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed customization screen, displays the light amount adjustment screen on the forefront of the display area SG10, and proceeds to step 3668. On the other hand, if No in step 3655, the process moves to step 3668. If the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated while the standby demo screen is displayed, the light intensity adjustment screen (the screen for executing the light intensity adjustment) is not displayed, but the light intensity adjustment is possible. (It is the same process as the in-game customization control process described later).

If No in step 3652, in step 3658 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. If Yes in step 3658, in step 3660, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed customization screen and standby demo screen, and the customization execution screen (to switch ON / OFF of the automatic button operation setting). The screen) is displayed in the foreground of the display area, and the process proceeds to step 3668. The structure of the standby demo screen applicable to this example is (1) the volume of the standby demo screen displayed is relatively low or silent (details will be described later), (2) standby The demo display period (the maximum display period of the period in which the standby demo screen can be displayed) is longer than the demo start value (240 seconds) (for example, 660 seconds), and (3) the standby demo screen Even if there is no game ball entering the main game starting port during display, the display of the standby demo screen ends due to the detection of the firing handle D44. (4) The non-game period starts in the time-saving game state Even if the value (240 seconds) is reached, the standby demo screen is not displayed, and only the volume is the same as when the standby demo screen is displayed. (5) Situation where right-handing should be executed (for example, time-saving game state) And, while the standby demo screen is displayed (or non-gaming period) (Specific period), or when the maximum volume that can be output is relatively low (may be in the mute state), a specific right-handed instruction display is displayed or a sound is output by detection of the firing handle D44 ( (Details will be described later), (6) When the standby demo screen is displayed, the sub-input button SB is operated to display the customization in progress screen on the front layer, and the pattern variation stop display screen (normal decorative design stop pattern is displayed). Is displayed on the rear layer, the pattern fluctuation stop display screen is displayed depending on the detection of the firing handle D44, and when the cross key SB-2 is operated, the standby demo screen continues to be displayed, but the volume and light intensity are changed. It may be configured as follows. As a concrete display example of the standby demo screen, a moving image for explaining a game or a motif introduction (character introduction or notice introduction) of a gaming machine may be displayed. The display condition of the standby demo screen is not limited to the fact that the non-game period becomes the demo start value (240 seconds in this example), and for example, the time when the operation of the firing handle D44 is not detected. (Or, the time when the game ball is not fired) reaches the predetermined time A (10 seconds), the standby demo screen is displayed, and the maximum display time of the standby demo screen is the predetermined time B (100 seconds). May be. In such a case, the predetermined time A (10 seconds) is longer than the shortest fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) in the gaming machine and shorter than the maximum fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds). Is. The predetermined time B (10 seconds) is also longer than the shortest fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) in the gaming machine and shorter than the maximum fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds). Further, it is the time when the operation of the firing handle D44 is not detected (or the time when the game ball is not fired), rather than the average time from the time when the game ball is fired on the game board surface to the time when it flows into the outlet D36. It is preferable that the predetermined time A (10 seconds) is longer (in order to prevent the situation where the standby demo screen is displayed despite the player firing the game ball).

  If No in step 3658, in step 3662 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left / right button of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. If Yes in step 3662, in step 3664 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the volume adjustment prohibition flag is off. If Yes in step 3664, in step 3665 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the customization guide screen is being displayed. If Yes in step 3665, in step 3666, the displayed customization screen is erased, the volume adjustment screen is displayed on the foreground of the display area SG10, and the process proceeds to step 3668. On the other hand, if No in step 3665, the process moves to step 3668. If the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated while the standby demo screen is displayed, the volume adjustment screen (the screen for executing the volume adjustment) is not displayed, but the volume adjustment is possible. (It is the same process as the in-game customization control process described later). Also, the volume adjustment screen may be hidden while the symbol variation display, the standby demo screen, or the symbol variation stop display screen is displayed, or the volume adjustment screen is always displayed while the symbol variation stop display screen is displayed. The volume control screen may be displayed, and the volume control screen may be changed with the cross key SB-2 and the volume control screen may be changed according to the volume level. Alternatively, the cross key SB-2 may be displayed so that the volume level can be adjusted and the display of the volume adjustment screen can be changed according to the volume level.

Here, to summarize the processing of steps 3662 to 3666,
(1) When the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated when the first customization guide screen is displayed and the volume adjustment prohibition flag is ON, the volume adjustment screen is not displayed, and the volume level Not changeable (2) When the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated when the first customization guide screen is displayed and the volume adjustment prohibition flag is OFF → The volume adjustment screen is displayed, and according to the display Volume level can be changed (3) When the standby demo screen is displayed and the volume adjustment prohibition flag is off, operating the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 → the volume adjustment screen is not displayed (standby The demo screen remains displayed) and the volume level can be changed.

Next, in step 3668, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the non-gaming period measurement timer value is equal to or greater than the demonstration start value (240 seconds). If Yes in step 3668, in step 3670, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the standby demo screen on the forefront of the display area SG10. Next, in step 3672, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets the demo screen mode to the sub-side game state type, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). In the present embodiment, the standby demo screen is displayed when the non-gaming period measurement timer value reaches the demo start value, but the display start condition of the standby demo screen is not limited to this. No, for example, when the non-game period measurement timer value becomes the demo start value in the non-time shortened game state, the standby demo screen is displayed, while the non-game period measurement timer value starts in the time shortened game state. When the value is reached, the standby demo screen may not be displayed (in the time shortening game state, the standby demo screen is not displayed regardless of the non-game period measurement timer value). Further, in the case of such a configuration, the volume output when the non-game period measurement timer value becomes the demo start value regardless of the game state is the volume of the demo screen mode "1" (Fig. 45) or it may be configured to be silent, that is, may be configured to be lower than the current set value of the volume (volume determined by the volume switch and the volume level) or to be silent, and also regarding the light amount. Similarly, it may be configured to be lower than the current set value of the light quantity (light quantity determined from the light quantity level) or to be silent. Further, in the time shortening game state, the non-gaming time measuring timer HY10t may not be measured itself (the timer value is always 0 and the time is not measured).

  If No in step 3668, in step 3674, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines that the non-gaming period measurement timer value is the second guidance value (the timer value at which the second customization guidance screen is displayed. In this example, , 75 seconds) or more. If Yes in step 3674, in step 3676, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the second customization guide screen on the forefront of the display area SG10, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). Even if No in step 3664 or step 3674, the process moves to the next process (process in step 4200). Although the customization guide screen is not displayed during the standby demo screen is displayed, the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are turned on (at the edges of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2. (A lamp that can be turned on is provided) (it is turned on even when the customization screen is displayed).

  Next, FIG. 42 is an example of a customization guide screen image diagram according to the present embodiment. First, the upper left part is the first customization guide screen, the upper right part is the second customization guide screen, and the lower left part is the standby demo screen. The first customization guide screen is displayed. On the first customization screen, it is displayed that the automatic button operation setting can be changed by pressing the sub input button SB, and the method of adjusting the volume / light amount is not displayed. The display of the first customization screen is semi-transparent, and even if the display of the first customization guide screen and the decorative design are displayed in an overlapping manner, the decorative design is visible. Further, by pressing the sub-input button SB while the first customization guide screen is displayed, it is possible to customize the actual machine (change the automatic button operation setting).

  Next, after the first customization guide screen is displayed, the second customization guide screen is displayed when 70 seconds have passed in the non-gaming state (75 seconds have passed since the non-gaming period). Is displayed. The second customization guide screen has a display mode in which, in addition to the display mode of the first customization guide screen, a volume adjustment guide image and a light amount adjustment guide image are added to the lower portion of the display area SG10. The first customization guidance screen and the second customization guidance screen are semi-transparent, like the first customization guidance screen.

Next, after the second customization guide screen is displayed, when 165 seconds have passed in the non-gaming state (240 seconds have passed from the non-gaming period), the standby demo screen is displayed. Is displayed. In the standby demo screen, the display of the first customization guide screen and the second customization guide screen is erased, and the story display and the like are displayed. Incidentally, the standby demo screen is not translucent, and when the display of the standby demo screen and the decorative design are displayed in an overlapping manner, the decorative design is invisible or difficult to see (display of the decorative design). The display area is smaller than the display of the standby demo screen, the display of the decorative pattern is displayed on the rear layer than the display of the standby demo screen, etc.). When the on-adjustment prohibition flag is on, the on-adjustment display is not displayed on the second customization guide screen.

Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the customization-in-progress display control process according to the subroutine of step 4200 in FIG. First, in step 4202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the light amount adjustment screen is being displayed. If Yes in step 4202, in step 4204 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. If Yes in step 4204, in step 4206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the selected light amount level based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and executes lighting in the confirmation lighting pattern. , And proceeds to step 4220. In this embodiment, when adjusting the light amount level,
(1) When the light intensity level is selected by the cross key SB-2, the light is turned on in the confirmation lighting pattern corresponding to the light intensity level being selected. (2) When the light intensity level is determined by the sub input button SB, A confirmation notification display is displayed in the display area SG10 to notify which of the light intensity levels has been determined (sound is output).
(3) The lighting pattern of the confirmation lighting pattern is the same as the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness of the “production system A” of the “electrical decoration table 2” in FIG. 69 (the number of times of repeating the lighting pattern is 2).
It is configured as described above.

Further, in the case of No in step 4202, in step 4208, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the volume control screen is being displayed. If Yes in step 4208, in step 4210, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. If Yes in step 4210, in step 4212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the selected volume level based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, outputs the confirmation sound, and proceeds to step 4220. Transition. In the present embodiment, when adjusting the volume level,
(1) When the volume level is selected with the cross key SB-2, a confirmation sound corresponding to the selected volume level is output. (2) When the volume level is determined with the sub input button SB, the volume level A confirmation notification display is displayed in the display area SG10 for notifying which is determined (outputs sound).
(3) The volume of the confirmation sound is the same as the “non-error volume determination table” in FIG. 71.
It is configured as described above. It should be noted that a configuration may be applied in which the volume control screen described above is always displayed (or is always displayed during symbol stop display, symbol variation display, etc.) without outputting the confirmation sound.

Further, in the case of No in step 4208, in step 4214, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the customization in-progress screen is being displayed. If Yes in step 4214, in step 4216 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left / right button of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 4216, in step 4218, the CPU SC of the sub control board S switches the on / off selection of the automatic button operation based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to step 4220. In the present embodiment, when changing the automatic button operation setting, when the on / off of the automatic button operation setting is determined by the cross key SB-2, an announcement corresponding to the on / off is displayed (on. Display example in the case of: "Automatic button operation setting is turned on, automatic button operation setting is turned off by pressing the button during the game", Display example in case of off: "Automatic button operation setting is off The automatic button operation setting is turned on by long pressing the button during the game. Even if No in step 4216, discard 4
The process proceeds to 220.

  Next, in step 4220, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button has been operated, in other words, whether or not the volume level, the light amount level, or the automatic button operation setting has been determined. If Yes in step 4220, the process moves to step 4224. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4220, in step 4222, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of displaying the customized screen. If Yes in step 4222, in step 4224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the customization screen after determining the currently selected volume level, light level, or automatic button operation setting (game machine customization setting). To do. As described above, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine customization setting is determined when the sub input button SB is operated, or a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed without operating the sub input button SB on the customization screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, (1) the operation of the firing handle D44 is detected, (2) the symbol variation starts, (3) a predetermined entrance (for example, the first main A gaming machine customization setting may be determined when a gaming ball enters the game starting opening A10). Also, even if the pattern change of the decorative pattern is started while the customization screen is displayed, the customization screen remains displayed (the customization screen is displayed in the front layer rather than the variable display of the decorative pattern), and the gaming machine customization is executed. It may be configured as possible.

  Next, in step 4225, the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets and starts the non-gaming period measurement timer (increment timer). As described above, in this embodiment, it is determined that the non-gaming period starts from the timing when the gaming machine customization setting is determined. Next, in step 4226, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the automatic button operation setting is determined to be ON. If Yes in step 4226, in step 4228 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the automatic button flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3606). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4226, in step 4230, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the automatic button operation setting is determined to be off. If Yes in step 4230, in step 4232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the automatic button flag and shifts to the next process (the process of step 3606). Even if No in step 4214, step 4222, or step 4230, the process moves to the next process (process in step 3606).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode relating to the gaming machine customization from the start of the non-gaming period (the timing when the measurement of the non-gaming period measuring timer HY10t starts) is “non-gaming period measuring timer value = 0 seconds. → Start of non-gaming period ”→“ Non-gaming period measurement timer value = 5 seconds → Display start of first customization guide screen, customization screen (customization in progress screen, light intensity adjustment screen and volume adjustment screen are collectively referred to as customization screen (Start of the period) → "Non-gaming period measurement timer value = 75 seconds → Start display of second customization guide screen" → "Non-gaming period measurement timer value = 240 seconds → Display start and customization of standby demo screen Configured to be "end of screen transferable period" → "non-game period measurement timer value = 900 seconds → execute default setting, start displaying screen during power saving" However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, "non-game period measurement timer value = 0 seconds → start of non-game period" → "non-game period measurement timer value = 5 seconds → start of transition period of customized screen (screen "Display does not change)" → "Non-gaming period measurement timer value = 75 seconds → Start display of the second customization guide screen, start lighting the lamps provided on the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2" → "Non-gaming" Period measurement timer value = 240 seconds → Start display of standby demo screen, end of transition period of customized screen "→" Non-game period measurement timer value = 900 seconds → Perform default setting, start displaying power saving screen " You may comprise. The start of the shiftable period of the customized screen means that the period in which the customized screen is displayed is started by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB-2.

  Next, FIG. 44 is an example of an image diagram of a customization guide screen according to the present embodiment. First, in the left part of the figure, the player operates the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 when the first customization guide screen or the second customization guide screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. The display mode of the setting screen of volume control displayed in the case is shown. Specifically, when the first customization guide screen or the second customization guide screen is displayed, when the player operates the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, the volume control screen is displayed, and the volume control screen is displayed. When the left button of the cross key SB-2 is pressed during the display of, the confirmation sound from the speaker D24 becomes smaller, and the lighting part (white part) of the volume display of the upper speaker schematic diagram decreases. When the right button of the SB-2 of the cross key is pressed (indicating that the volume level decreases), the confirmation sound from the speaker D24 becomes louder and the volume display of the upper speaker schematic diagram is displayed. The lit part (white part) of increases (indicating that the volume level increases), and by pressing the sub input button SB, the volume being selected It is configured to be determined to the bell.

  Next, the middle part of the figure is displayed when the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 is operated when the first customization guide screen or the second customization guide screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. The display mode of the setting screen of the light amount adjustment is shown. Specifically, when the player operates the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed, and the first customization guide screen or the second customization guidance screen is displayed while the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. If the upper button of the cross key SB-2 is pressed while the cross key SB-2 is pressed, the petal-shaped lighting portion displayed on the effect display device SG is displayed in three levels of "0 → 6 → 12". When the lower button of the cross-shaped key SB-2 is pressed, the number of petal-shaped lighting portions displayed on the effect display device SG is increased to 12 (indicating that the light amount level is increased). The light intensity level is reduced in three stages of 1 → 6 → 0 (indicating that the light intensity level decreases), and the light intensity level being selected is determined by pressing the sub input button SB. There is. It should be noted that even if the cross key SB-2 is operated while the standby demo screen is displayed, the volume control screen and the light intensity control screen are not displayed, but the volume level and the light intensity level themselves can be changed. In addition, in the figure, the display corresponding to the light amount level is a petal-like display, and the lighting portion is configured to increase in three stages of "0 → 6 → 12", but this is not a limitation. Instead, the lighting portion may be configured to increase in three steps of “1 piece → 2 pieces → 3 pieces”, or three petal-shaped displays may be provided (display areas having different sizes, The petals may be configured to increase in three stages of “small, medium, and small petals (3)” and “small to medium to large”.

  Next, the right part of the figure is displayed when the sub input button SB is operated when the first customization guide screen, the second customization guide screen or the standby demo screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. 7 illustrates a display mode of a customization in-progress screen. Specifically, when the player operates the sub input button SB, a customization screen is displayed, and when the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are pressed on the customization screen, the automatic button operation settings of "ON" and "OFF" are displayed. When the cursor is moved and the sub input button SB is pressed, the setting of the selected cursor is set. Here, when it is decided with "ON", the automatic button operation setting screen is erased, and "The automatic button operation setting is turned on, the automatic button operation will be turned off by pressing the button during the game" is displayed. To be done. On the other hand, if it is decided with "OFF", the automatic button operation setting screen disappears and "The automatic button operation setting has been turned off, the automatic button operation will be turned on by long pressing the button during the game" is displayed. It

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the in-game customization control process according to the subroutine of step 4250 in FIG. First, in step 4251, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the automatic button flag is off. If Yes in step 4251, in step 4252 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S presses the sub input button SB for a long time (in this process, pressing the sub input button SB continuously for 1 second or more is regarded as a long press). ) Is detected. In addition, in the present embodiment, the operation member for determining the long press in step 4252 is the sub input button SB, but the operation member is not limited to this, and may be the lever SB-3, or the sub input button SB and the lever. It may be configured to determine any long press with SB-3. If Yes in step 4252, in step 4254, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a button effective period (button single push effect, button continuous hit effect, button long press effect, or hidden button effect) during the long press period. The period during which the operation of the sub input button SB is accepted due to the change in the symbol = the period during which the effect is executed by operating the sub input button SB) or the lever effective period (lever single pulling effect, lever continuous pulling effect, lever lengthening effect, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not a period for accepting the operation of the lever SB-3 due to a variation in the pattern for executing the hidden button effect = a period for which the effect is executed by operating the lever SB-3) is not crossed. Here, when the long press period extends over the button effective period (or the lever effective period), (1) the pressing of the sub input button SB is started before the start of the button effective period (or the lever effective period). After that, if the sub input button SB is kept pressed for 1 second and the button is still valid during the 1 second, (2) the sub input button SB is pushed during the button valid period (or the lever valid period). When the sub input button SB is started for one second and then held for one second, and the button valid period (or lever valid period) has not been reached after the one second has elapsed (the button valid period has ended), . If Yes in step 4254, in step 4256, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the non-game period measurement timer value is smaller than the first guide value (5 seconds in this example). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the non-gaming period has elapsed for 5 seconds or more, the first customization guide screen is displayed, so that the change of the automatic button operation setting by the long press of the sub input button SB is invalid. It becomes, before the non-gaming period 5 seconds have elapsed, start pressing the sub-input button SB, and then keep the sub-input button SB pressed for 1 second, and the non-gaming period is 5 seconds or more after the 1 second has elapsed. Even if the time has elapsed, the change of the automatic button operation setting by the long press of the sub input button SB becomes invalid. In the case of Yes in step 4256, in step 4258, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a symbol variation for executing the hidden button effect. If Yes in step 4258, in step 4260, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the automatic button flag, and proceeds to step 4264. Even if No in step 4252, step 4254, step 4256, or step 4258, the process proceeds to step 4264.

Further, in the case of No in step 4251, in other words, when the automatic button flag is on, in step 4262 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the operation of the sub input button SB is detected. If Yes in step 4262, in step 4263 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the automatic button flag, and proceeds to step 4264. Even if No in step 4262, the process proceeds to step 4264. In the present embodiment, the automatic button flag is configured to be turned off when the sub input button is pressed once when the automatic button flag is on. The flag may be turned off or may not be turned off. Further, as a specific example in which the automatic button flag is turned off by operating the sub input button SB when the automatic button flag is turned on during the game,
(1) Automatic button input (automatic button flag is on when the button effect (button single-press effect, button continuous effect, button long-press effect) is executed, so button continuous effect can be achieved without operating the sub-input button SB. If the player operates the sub-input button SB before the execution is sometimes referred to as "automatic button input",
(2) When the player operates the sub input button SB during the automatic button input in the button continuous hit effect or the button long press effect,
(3) When the player operates the sub input button SB during execution of the notice effect in which the automatic button input is not executed,
Etc. can be illustrated.

  Next, in step 4264, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation of the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 is detected. If Yes in step 4264, in step 4266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adjusts the light amount level based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3606). On the other hand, if No in step 4264, in step 4268 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 is detected. If Yes in step 4268, in step 4270 the CPUSC of the sub control board S adjusts the volume level based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3606). Even if No in step 4269, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3606). As described above, in the present embodiment, the light amount level and the volume level can be adjusted by operating the cross key SB-2 even during the non-gaming period. Specifically, the cross key SB-2 is used. The upper button increases the light intensity by one step, the lower button of the cross key SB-2 decreases the light intensity by one step, the right button of the cross key SB-2 increases the volume by one step, and the left button of the cross key SB-2. The button increases the volume by one step. In addition, in the present embodiment, an effect of operating the cross key SB-2 in an effect during the game (for example, button effect) (an effect of performing a notice effect by operating the cross key SB-2) is provided. However, if such an effect is provided, it becomes impossible to adjust the light amount level and the volume level by operating the cross key SB-2 during the effective period of the cross key SB-2 in the effect. It is desirable to configure. Further, it is possible to change other than the volume and the light amount by operating the cross key SB-2. For example, by changing the production mode, the probability of occurrence of a particular production is increased or decreased, and the tendency of the produced production is different. May be configured to be changeable. In such a case, for example, the volume and effect mode can be changed by operating the cross key SB-2 while the design is changing, and the volume and the light amount can be changed by operating the cross key SB-2 while the standby demo screen is displayed. The presentation mode may be changed. Also, during the symbol change (or during the symbol change and 5 seconds before the non-gaming period starts), the volume level can be adjusted by operating the cross key SB-2, while the cross key SB-2 The light amount level may not be adjusted by operation.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the music piece selection processing relating to the subroutine of step 3700 in FIG. First, in step 3702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a big hit capable of selecting music is being executed. In other words, depending on the type of jackpot to be executed (type of jackpot symbol) and the game state when the jackpot is won (when the jackpot symbol is stopped), it becomes different whether music can be selected or not, for example, stop during time saving. The music can be selected only in the case of the symbol 7B (probability variation big hit of 10 rounds in the second main game stop symbol), and the music can not be selected in other big hits. If Yes in step 3702, in step 3704, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a big hit medium song selection process, which is a process for causing the player to select a song during a big hit, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3702, in step 3706, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is currently in the short-time saving (non-probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state or probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state). Or not. If Yes in step 3706, in step 3708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a time saving medium song selection process that is a process for allowing the player to select a song during time saving (time saving game state), which will be described later. To do. After step 3704, after step 3708, or in the case of No in step 3706, the process moves to the next process (process of step 3800).

Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the big hit medium song selection processing according to the subroutine of step 3704 in FIG. First, in step 3704-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is a music selection valid period (a period in which music selection is possible). Supplementary explanation about the valid period of song selection is the jackpot start demonstration time (the period from the start of the jackpot until the opening of the big winning opening of the first round in the jackpot) and the jackpot end demonstration time (the jackpot of the final round of the jackpot). During the period from the end of the opening of the winning opening to the end of the big hit), the selection of music is impossible. In addition, in the case of a jackpot capable of selecting music, when a selection time of a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) is set after the jackpot start demonstration time, (1) when the sub input button SB is pressed to determine the music, (2) When a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed without button operation (operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2) after the jackpot start demonstration time is over, (3) cross key SB- 2 When a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the up button or down button (sometimes referred to as the up / down button) is operated, if any of the conditions is satisfied, at that time The music on which the cursor is positioned is determined, and the music selection valid period ends. In other words, from the start of opening the special winning opening of the first round in the big hit (from the end of the big hit start demo time), operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, and further operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 By operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 again before the predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed, the music selection valid period is continued across the rounds, and the music selection valid period until the end of the final round in the jackpot. It is also possible to continue. If the specification is such that the song on which the cursor is positioned is forcibly decided at the end of the specific round, the song in the middle of selection will be decided against the intention of the player, which is not desirable for the player. In particular, the more songs that are selected, the more time it takes to select a song (song confirmation time per song x number of selected songs = song selection time). Therefore, sufficient music selection time is required as in the present invention. The assured configuration works effectively. If the music is not decided until the end of the final round in the big hit, the music decided at the start of the big hit will be output in succession to the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit. That is, the process is considered to be that the player did not have the intention of selecting. When the music selection valid period reaches 5 seconds, the countdown display is started to notify the player of the remaining time. Of course, the display is not limited to the countdown display using images, and a configuration may be used in which notification is performed by voice, lighting of an LED, or the like, or a combination thereof may be used.

  If Yes in step 3704-1, in step 3704-2, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. If Yes in step 3704-2, in step 3704-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects a song (first option) corresponding to the operation of the up / down buttons, and outputs the selected song, Go to step 3704-4. At this time, the output of the selected music is started from a predetermined point in the middle of the music (for example, chorus or just before entering chorus). Incidentally, when the output is started from a point in the middle of the music, it is preferable to configure so that the player can immediately determine which music by listening to the music, like just before entering the chorus or chorus, With such a configuration, the player can easily select a desired music piece. In particular, when the number of selectable songs is large, the time for the player to select a song becomes long, so that the operation is more effective. In addition, when "Omakase" (the second option) for selecting music on the gaming machine side is selected, when "Omakase" is selected and no music is selected (the music has not been determined) If the conditions (1), (2), and (3), which are the conditions for determining the above-described music, are output as the exclusive music that is output only, it is determined that "Omakase" has been determined. Then, the music is selected by the music selection at the time of selecting “Random” to be described later, and the output of the determined music is started in step 3704-8 described later. On the other hand, if No in step 3704-2, the process moves to step 3704-4. When outputting the dedicated music output only when “Omakase” is selected, the music may be output from the beginning (cue) or may be output from the middle.

  Note that the point in the middle of the music is not limited to the chorus or just before entering the chorus, and the point can be reproduced from a characteristic riff in the music. Further, in the case of a music piece starting from the chorus, since the output (cue) from the beginning of the music piece = starting from the chorus, such a configuration may be adopted.

Also, as the output method starting from chorus,
Either one of (1) a method of using one piece of music data to reproduce from a predetermined reproduction point and (2) a method of separately providing music data starting from chorus may be used. Also, in the latter case, the time from the player moving the cursor to the music until the determination is set to a predetermined time (7 seconds), so the music data starting from the chorus has a predetermined time (7 seconds). It is enough to prepare the data that exceeds a little.

  Next, in step 3704, it is determined whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. If Yes in step 3704-4, in step 3704-5, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the character displayed on the liquid crystal in response to the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, and responds. Output music. At this time, similarly to the case where the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated, the output of the music starts from a predetermined midpoint of the music (for example, chorus or just before entering chorus). On the other hand, if No in step 3704-4, the process moves to step 3704-6.

  Next, in step 3704-6, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. If Yes in step 3704-6, in step 3704-8, the currently selected song is determined, and the output of the determined song is started. In step 3704-8, output is started from the beginning of the determined music. If No in step 3704-6, in step 3704-7, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the timing for ending the music selection valid period. Also in the case of Yes in step 3704-7, the process proceeds to step 3704-8, and determination and output of music are started. After completion of step 3704-8, if No in step 3704-1 or No in step 3704-7, the process proceeds to step 3704-9.

  Next, in step 3704-9, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the music has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 3704-9, in step 3704-10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces an effect (i.e. an effect during a big hit, for example, an effect for notifying a probability change, an effect for notifying round promotion ), It is determined whether or not the button is not valid. If Yes in step 3704-10, in step 3704-12, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. If Yes in step 3704-12, in step 3704-13, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the light amount in response to the operation of the up and down buttons of the ten-key SB-2, and displays an image indicating the light amount on the liquid crystal. (See, for example, FIG. 44), and then proceeds to step 3704-14. Even if No in step 3704-12, the process proceeds to step 3704-14. Next, in step 3704-14, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left button or the right button (also referred to as a left / right button) of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. If Yes in step 3704-14, in step 3704-15, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the volume in response to the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, and the image indicating the volume is displayed on the liquid crystal (production). It is displayed on the display device SG) (see, for example, FIG. 44), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3800). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3704-10, at step 3704-11, the control corresponding to the operation effect of the sub input button SB is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3800). In addition, in the case of No in step 3704-9 and also in the case of No in step 3704-14, the process proceeds to the next process (step 3800).

In the meantime, when the power is cut off while the big hit is undecided (in a situation where the big hit is in progress and the music is not decided), and then the power is restored, the following configuration is also used. Good.
(1) When the power is restored, the dedicated big hit effect is executed (BGM corresponding to the dedicated big hit effect when the power is restored is output), and the music selection becomes impossible. In this case, when the time shortening game state is entered after the end of the big hit, the music selected at the start of the big hit is output instead of the BGM corresponding to the big hit effect dedicated to power restoration.
(2) In the round when the power is restored, the display mode of the liquid crystal screen (the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG), the sound output mode, and the LED lighting mode are only for the power recovery (for example, the liquid crystal screen is “screen recovery”). "Middle", no sound is output, LED is not output, etc.), and when the next round after the power is restored, the display mode of the liquid crystal screen, the sound output mode, and the LED lighting mode before the power failure occurs are restored. Then, the big hit production will continue.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the time saving medium song selection processing according to the subroutine of step 3708 in FIG. First, in step 3708-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the music selection screen is displayed. In the case of Yes in step 3708-1, in step 3708-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the music selection screen display timing (for example, the super reach is executed, the loss pattern is stopped, the normal screen return timing after that, Jackpot end demo time end towing, etc.). If Yes in step 3708-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the music selection screen in step 3708-3, and proceeds to step 3708-4. On the other hand, if No in step 3708-1 or No in step 3708-2, the process proceeds to step 3708-4.

  Next, in step 3708-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the music selection is valid. If Yes in step 3708-4, in step 3708-5, it is determined whether the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is not executing a specific effect (for example, a specific character zone, a prefetch zone effect, which will be described in detail later). To judge. If Yes in step 3708-5, the process moves to step 3708-9. On the other hand, if No in step 3708-5, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S erases the music selection screen in step 3708-6, and proceeds to step 3708-9. Although the music selection screen is erased from the liquid crystal during the specific effect, music selection is possible. However, the music in the music selection is not output, and the BGM corresponding to the specific effect is still output. That is, even if the player operates the cross key SB-2 during the execution of the specific effect, the BGM corresponding to the specific effect is still output, but the music output after the execution of the specific effect is the specific effect. It may be different from the music that was output before the execution of. Further, the start timing of the specific effect is, for example, (1) start of fluctuation, (2) after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and (3) a specific time after a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation ( For example, after 3.15 seconds) has elapsed. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3708-4, in step 3708-7, the CPUSC of the sub control board S gives a BGM change notice (a notice that the BGM changes from the start of fluctuation, for example, a big hit is almost deterministic). Or the jackpot expectation is relatively high). If Yes in step 3708-7, in step 3708-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the music selection screen, and proceeds to step 3708-9. Even if No in step 3708-7, the process proceeds to step 3708-9.

Next, in step 3708-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. If Yes in step 3708-9, in step 3708-10, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S selects (determines) a music in response to the operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 (the cross key during the time saving). Selection of music by operation of the up and down buttons of SB-2 = decision of music becomes, and hereinafter, may be described as “selection (decision)”}, and output of the corresponding music is started. At this time, the output is started not at the beginning of the music but at a predetermined midway point (for example, chorus). In the case of the BGM change notice, the music selection display screen may not be changed and the music may not be changed even if the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated. In this case, the BGM is changed. The change notice is different from the normal notice (in the situation where the music selection screen is displayed, the music can be selected by operating the up / down buttons during the normal notice, but when the BGM is changed, the up / down buttons can be selected. The music cannot be selected by the operation), which indicates to the player that the fluctuation this time has a high expectation. Note that the presentation mode of the BGM change notice is not limited to this, and when the BGM change notice is executed, the BGM dedicated to the execution of the BGM change notice is output, and the song name where the cursor on the song selection screen is located is displayed. A BGM dedicated to the execution of the BGM change notice may be displayed, and music may not be selected by operating the up / down buttons. After completion of step 3708-10, or in the case of No at step 3708-9, the process proceeds to step 3708-11. Next, in step 3708-11, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. If Yes in step 3708-11, in step 3708-12, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the volume in response to the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, and displays an image showing the volume on the liquid crystal. (See FIG. 44, for example), and the process moves to step 3708-13. On the other hand, if No in step 3708-11, the process moves to step 3708-13. Next, in step 3708-13, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a music change. If Yes in step 3708-13, in step 3708-14, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets to switch to the background image corresponding to the determined music at the start timing of the next change, and starts the next change. Switch the background image at the timing. After completion of step 3708-14, or if No in step 3708-13, the process shifts to the next process (step 3800).

  That is, in the big hit medium music selection process, the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are used to change and select the music one by one until the music is determined (the music is selected by operating the sub input button SB. The left and right buttons are used to change the character and change and select the song corresponding to the character (changed to the first song of the song corresponding to the character), after the song is determined The up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are used to change the light amount of the LED, and the left and right buttons are used to change the volume. With such a configuration, various effect displays and sound outputs can be realized without providing an operation unit (for example, a button) corresponding to the sub-control board S side more than necessary. In the time saving medium music selection process, the music is selected (determined) only by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, and the music can be changed by a simpler operation than during the big hit.

In addition to the above-described embodiment, the following configurations are possible.
(1) When one of the cross key SB-2 (up / down / left / right buttons) and the sub input button SB is operated while the other is operated, only the button operation (one operation) operated first is valid. Yes, the button operation (the other operation) operated later is invalid.
(2) When one of the cross key SB-2 (up / down / left / right buttons) and the sub input button SB is being operated while the other is being operated, the previously operated button operation (one operation) is Since it is processed as if there was an operation at the time of pressing, the button operation (the other operation) operated later is also valid.
(3) When the power is cut off and the power is restored after the power is cut off, the music selected before the power is cut may be restored as long as the backup is provided. As long as the configuration does not include a backup, the preset default music may be restored.
(4) When the power is cut off and then the power is restored, the liquid crystal image and the sound output are restored earlier in the liquid crystal image, but music selection is not possible (may be music selection).
(5) When the power is cut off and then the power is restored, the sound output is restored earlier in the liquid crystal image and the sound output, and the music selection is not possible (the music selection may be possible).
(6) Music can be selected for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) after the power is cut off during time saving and power is restored, but the selected music is output because the sound is output when the power is restored. Not done.
(7) Music can be selected for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) after the power is cut off during the time saving and the power is restored thereafter, and the selected music is output together with the sound output when the power is restored.
(8) Music can not be selected for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) after power is cut off during time saving and power is restored, and music can be selected after sound output at power restoration is completed. Become.
(9) A movable body accessory (a movable body accessory other than the movable body accessory YK) that does not occur or does not operate when the selected music is being output is provided. For example, in the situation where the music is output during the time saving, the production which occurs only in the low probability and the non-time saving (the non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state) is not naturally performed, and the high expectation is high. A movable body accessory that operates only when BGM or SE (sound effect) produced by the above is output may be provided.
(10) Change of BGM in low probability and non-time saving (non-stochastic variation game state and non-time shortening game state) (from normal background BGM, tempai-inspired BGM, reach development BGM, reach production BGM, look-ahead stage BGM, pseudo The change to the continuous BGM or the like) is triggered by the stop of the symbol or the temporary stop of the symbol (design), but the change of the BGM during the time saving is possible by the operation of the player.
(11) In the time saving (time saving game state), if the music is changed by the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 while the fluctuation is stopped, the background image may be changed immediately, or the next fluctuation starts. You may change it from time to time.
(12) Instead of selecting (or deciding) a music by operating the cross key SB-2, a structure may be selected (or deciding) by operating the sub input button SB.
(13) The background image (so-called effect stage, effect mode) can be changed by operating the cross key SB-2 or the sub input button SB, and BGM corresponding to the background image may be output.

Next, FIG. 49 is an image diagram of a music selection screen during a big hit. First, the figure on the left is a music selection screen that is displayed when the jackpot start demonstration time ends. A character (elephant in this figure) is displayed on the left side of the middle part of the liquid crystal screen, and a plurality of songs and a cursor indicating the selected song are displayed on the right side of the middle part of the liquid crystal screen (in the figure, song A is It is placed on the cursor and selected). At the bottom left of the LCD screen, a character image of "character selection" indicating that a character can be selected and left and right buttons indicating that the left and right buttons can be operated are displayed. Displays a character image of "Song selection" indicating that a song can be selected, and an up button and a down button indicating that the up and down buttons can be operated.The song is displayed on the lower right side of the LCD screen. A character image of “determination” indicating the determination and an image of the sub input button SB are displayed. In addition, on the left side of the upper part of the liquid crystal screen, the number of rounds is displayed and a series of holidays is being played. In the case of having a mode (a mode in which the gaming state is not notified, for example, it may be configured to be a latent mode due to a sudden change and non-time saving), the latent mode may be regarded as being in a condominium. The term "end" may mean that the player has returned to the normal mode). The total number of coins that has been acquired is displayed, the character image "Please select a song" is displayed in the upper center of the LCD screen, and the LCD screen An image display of "→ right hit →" (right hit display) indicating that a game ball should be launched is displayed on the right side of the game board (right hit route) on the upper right side of. In the case of character selection, the music display is also changed, the music corresponding to the character is moved to the cursor, and when the corresponding character is changed due to the music change, the character display is also changed. Although not shown in this figure, if the total number of acquisitions (display) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, a number that is well separated such as 5000 or 10000), "5000 OVER" or "10000 OVER" is displayed. , An image display or voice (SE) indicating that the number exceeds a predetermined number
Output is done. At this time, the volume of the music becomes low, and the volume of the sound (SE) indicating that the number of songs exceeds the predetermined number may be higher than the volume of the music (when the output of the voice ends, the volume of the music is Return to). In addition, when there are songs that cannot be selected yet, “???” may be displayed as the multiple songs displayed, or when “???” is not displayed and a new song is added. The music may be displayed only on the. When "???" is displayed, "???" cannot be selected, so that "????" may not be aligned with the cursor position. More specifically, in this figure, the music A is currently selected, and when the lower button of the cross key SB-2 is operated in this state, the music moves down one by one. "Random" will be matched to the position. When the lower button of the cross key SB-2 is operated again, the music is further moved down one by one, so that "???" is aligned with the cursor position. Since "?" Is a song that cannot be selected yet, another song in the next display order (for example, the cursor jumps over "???") without matching "???" The cursor will be positioned on the song I} of the song list (normal selection) in FIG. 52 (the cursor position for two songs is moved by operating the cross key SB-2 once). The sound while the cursor jumps over "???" may be any of the following.
(1) Cursor moving sound effect (music is not played)
(2) Play the song before "???" as it is (play the next song after jumping over "???")
(3) Silence However, for example, when "???" is continuously arranged over several songs, it takes time until the cursor jumps over, and (3) silence causes an uncomfortable feeling. It is desirable to configure as (2).

  Next, the figure on the right is the LCD screen during the big hit after the music is decided. The music selection screen is erased, and a display corresponding to the selected music (or character) (in the figure, the jackpot effect of an elephant) is performed. As an image displayed after selecting a song, the remaining count in the round (the number that can be entered into the special winning opening) is displayed as "○" in the center of the upper part of the LCD screen, and the number of the song in the lower part of the LCD screen is displayed. The lyrics are displayed. The other round number display, total acquisition number display, and right hit display are continuously displayed from the music selection screen. It should be noted that the display of "O" indicating the remaining count number is erased one by one each time the player enters the special winning opening, and the maximum count number is displayed again in the next round. This display of the count number may be displayed only during a big hit when the music can be selected, or may be displayed during other big hits as well, such as a round number display and a total acquisition count display. May be displayed at any big hit as long as the big hit can be won.

Next, FIG. 50 is an image diagram of a music selection screen during the time saving. The figure on the upper left is a diagram showing the music selection screen during the changing time and time, and the music I having the music number 09 (“# 09”) is selected. Since the background image corresponding to the music I is giraffe (see FIG. 52 for the correspondence between the music and the background image), giraffe is displayed as the background image. When a new song is added due to the last big hit, "NEW" is displayed in the number of the newly added song ("NEW" is displayed in "# 10" in this figure), and the game is played. The person can recognize that the song is a newly added song. Note that during the time saving, the music can be selected regardless of whether the change is stopped or being changed, but in any case, the background image (character image) is changed at the start of the next change (FIG. 48). The processing can be simplified by referring to Steps 3708-14, etc. Next, in the figure on the right in the upper row, the change time ends (here, 5 seconds later), the upper button of the cross key SB-2 is operated, and the music is changed from the music I of number 09 to the music J of number 10. ing. "# 10 Song J" is displayed at the cursor position,
The display of "NEW" has been erased by being positioned at the cursor position. Further, since the background images corresponding to the music J are elephants and lions, elephants and lions are displayed in the background images. The "NEW" display may not be erased only by matching the cursor position, but may be erased by the next big hit. Next, the diagram on the lower side (right side) is a diagram showing a case where a specific effect (a penguin effect in this figure) in which the background image changes during the time saving is generated, and the music selection screen is erased during the specific effect. There is. However, even if the music selection screen is deleted, music selection is possible. Since the output sound is the BGM corresponding to the specific effect, the volume of the BGM due to the music selection is zero. That is, by configuring the BGM or SE corresponding to the specific effect and the music selected by the music to be output on different channels, the music can be selected even during the specific effect, and after the specific effect ends, the selected music is It is configured to enable output. The lyrics of the selected song are not displayed during the time saving. Further, although not shown, the hold display may be performed during the normal fluctuation during the time saving, the hold display may be deleted when the specific effect occurs, and the hold display may be performed again when the specific effect ends. . That is, even if the game ball enters the second main game starting opening B10 (or the first main game starting opening A10) during the specific effect, the second main game symbol hold display section B21h (or the first main game symbol hold) A new hold is displayed on the display unit A21h), but the new hold is not displayed on the effect display device SG, and a new hold is enabled on the effect display device SG when the specific effect ends and the hold display becomes possible. The hold will be displayed. Further, since the hold is not displayed during the specific effect, the hold change effect (a change in the hold display that is displayed on the effect display device SG and the like may be a big hit in the change in the hold. Production that suggests) will not be performed. If it is determined during the specific effect that the pending display is changed, the pending display that has been changed to the pending display is performed at the timing when the specific presentation ends and the pending display becomes possible. Further, the hold prefetching effect during the time saving can be generated only for the hold related to the second main game symbol, and the hold prefetching effect during the non-time saving can be generated only for the hold related to the first main game symbol. It is also possible to do so.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a transition diagram of the liquid crystal screen when a big hit occurs during the time saving. First, in the upper left diagram, the music B is selected during the time saving. Next, it becomes a big hit and shifts to the upper right figure. Here, as the music selection screen at the start of the big hit, the music B is set at the cursor position. That is, the song (tune B in this figure) selected during the time saving before the jackpot start is displayed at the cursor position as the initially selected song on the song selection screen at the start of the jackpot. Next, shift to the lower left diagram. Here, the music C is selected (changed from the music B to the music C) by operating the upper button of the cross key SB-2. After that, the music C is determined by operating the sub input button SB or after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 7 seconds after operating the up / down buttons). Next, when the big hit ends, the figure on the right in the lower row shifts. It is a liquid crystal screen at the start of time saving after the big hit, and the music C determined during the big hit is displayed as the initial music at the start of the time saving (that is, the music C is displayed at the cursor position). In this way, when the player selects a song during the short-time saving, the song selected by the player during the short-time saving is displayed at the cursor position as the initial song on the song selection screen during the big hit, and the player is selected during the big-hit. When a song is selected and decided, the song selected by the player during the big hit is displayed at the cursor position as an initial song as a song selection screen during the time saving. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to continuously output the same song during the time saving and the big hit without changing the song selected and decided by the player on the gaming machine side.

Next, FIG. 52 is an example of a song list during a big hit or a short work. First, the music list (when selection is not possible) in the upper row shows the specifications of the music and the jackpot end demonstration time which are output in the jackpot production of the jackpot which cannot be selected. In these jackpot productions, since the corresponding dedicated jackpot songs are output, it is impossible to select the song. In addition, when selecting a song, it is not possible to select one of these big hit songs. At the time of the first hit (big hit from low probability and non-time saving), it is configured so as to be "CHALLENGE BONUS" which cannot select the music without fail. Even if the stop pattern 7B) becomes “HYPER BONUS” that is possible, music selection is impossible. In addition, from the high probability and time saving, even if there is a probability variation big hit of the first main game symbol (for example, a big hit due to the stop symbol 7A) that has a payout and a probability variation continues, a big hit performance in which the music cannot be selected is executed. Is configured. Next, the middle music list (at the time of normal selection) will be described. The music list is used when the music can be selected. That is, (1) when the big hit performance by the second main game symbol is "HYPER BONUS" (10 round probability variation big hit by stop symbol 7B during time saving), (2) time saving medium (low probability and time saving, or high probability and Shorter time), either of the cases. At the time of normal selection, music (or music number) is displayed on the music selection screen in the order of numbers shown in the music list. When the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated during a big hit or shortening of time, the display of the songs is changed corresponding to the operation of the up and down buttons in the order of the numbers shown in the song list. When the character is changed by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 on the music selection screen during the big hit, the music of the next character is selected. For example, when the right button of the cross key SB-2 is operated when the elephant is selected as the character and the song A is selected as the song, the song D is selected as the lion and the song as the character, and then right again. When the button is operated, the giraffe as the character and the music G as the music are selected. As described above, since the selection by the character and the selection for each music can be performed by the operation of the cross key SB-2 (up / down / left / right buttons), it is desirable that the music at the time of selecting the music is collected for each character. The music pieces J to N are music pieces that can be selected when a predetermined condition (opening condition) is satisfied.

  Next, the music list in the lower part (the order of selection when "Random" is selected) will be described. The music list is arranged in the order in which the music is selected when “Random” is selected. In addition, when "Omakase" is selected during the big hit or short time after the first hit, the start song is determined by lottery, and if "Omakase" continues to be selected after that, the song will start when the big hit starts. The songs are selected in the order of the list. A detailed concrete example will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the music can be selected only in the jackpot (“HYPER BONUS”), which has the highest expectation of winning balls during the time saving and the probability variation continues, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the jackpot with the highest expected degree of winning coins (for example, 10 round jackpot) can be selected, the song cannot be selected for other jackpots (for example, 4 round jackpot). Well, it is possible to win the ball and the probability change continues (probability change game state after the big hit) It is configured to be able to select music in the big hit, and it is difficult to win the ball (game toward the big winning opening Even if you continue to shoot the ball, only a small number of game balls enter the big winning opening) Big hit, probability fluctuation game state does not become after the big hit (non-stochastic fluctuation game state) Big hit, big hit execution time is relative In a short time, or the big hit is relatively small game ball number to be paid out at jackpot is also possible to configure so as to be impossible music selection.

Next, FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of music transition. First, (a) will be described. (A) shows the music transition when the player does not select a music (the cross key SB-2 or the sub input button SB is not operated). Specifically, the high-probability and time-saving rush initial song (the song that is output when the probability variation game state and the time-reduced game state after the big hit ends) is the mission after the first hit (CHALLENGE BONUS) (see FIG. 83). ), The music corresponds to the character selected by the player, which is music A here. Next, the music A is continuously selected because the music selection was not performed with a high probability and in a short time. Next, “Omakase” is selected as the initial position of the music during the big hit, and the music E is selected by lottery of the start music related to “Omakase”. It is configured to be forcibly changed to "Omakase" at the start of a big hit unless it has been changed from a high-probability and time-rushing initial song. Next, during the big hit, the music is not changed, the cursor remains "Random", and the music E at the big hit initial position of the big hit is still selected as the high probability and time saving medium initial position. When the next big hit occurs without a change of music with high probability and during time saving, the music D is selected according to the "music list (selection order when" Random "is selected)" (see FIG. 52) as the music initial position during the big hit. Has been done. In other words, when "Random" is selected, the music is changed at the start of the big hit. Next, the song D at the song initial position during the jackpot is continuously selected as the song initial position with a high probability and during the time reduction when the jackpot ends without changing the song during the jackpot and the probability is high and the time is shortened again. ing. Next, the characteristic point of (b) will be described. (B
In), the song A is selected as the high probability and time-saving entry initial song, and then the player selects “Random” as the song selection. At this time, a lottery of the starting music is performed as in the case of (a) (here, the music E is won). When a big hit occurs, the music D is selected as the initial position of the music during the big hit according to the "music list (selection order when" Random "is selected)" (see FIG. 52). Next, (c) will be described. In (c), the music A is selected as the high-probability and time-saving entry initial music, and then the music K is selected as the music selection by the player. After that, the music K is continuously selected until the player changes the music. Since the music is not changed here, the music K is continuously selected. Next, (d) will be described. In (d), the music A is selected as the high-probability and time-saving entry initial music, and then the music K is selected as the music selection by the player. Next, a big hit occurs, but as the initial position of the music during the big hit, the music K that has been selected as the music with high probability and short working hours is continuously selected. Next, the music is changed and the music M is selected during the big hit. After that, the music M is continuously selected until the player changes the music. Next, (e) will be described. In (e), the music A is selected as the high-probability and time-saving entry initial music, and then the music K is selected as the music selection by the player. Next, a big hit occurs, but as the initial position of the music during the big hit, the music K that has been selected as the music with high probability and short working hours is continuously selected. Next, "Random" is selected as the music selection by the player during the big hit, and the music E is selected by lottery of the start music. If the music is not changed by the player, each time a big hit occurs, the next music (here, as the music initial position during the big hit (selection order when "Random" is selected)) (see FIG. 52) Then, the music D) is selected. It should be noted that when the music is decided, the decision sound may be configured to be output as "picone", and when the music is decided only by the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, the decision sound may be outputted. May not be output. For example, during a big hit, the music is determined by operating the sub input button SB, so music A → up button operation → music B (from chorus) → sub input button SB operation → decision sound "picone" → music B ( (From the beginning), the music is changed, and during the time saving, the music is decided only by the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 regardless of the operation of the sub input button SB. Therefore, the music A → up button operation → The music is changed in the flow of the decision sound "Picone" → Music B. As described above, it is annoying that the decision sound is output each time the up / down button is operated during the time saving, so the music is decided by the operation of the up / down button during the time saving, but even if the decision sound is not output. Good.

Here, although not shown, a case where “Omakase” is selected (determined) multiple times during a time saving period will be described (during a big hit, a music (“( (Including "Random") is determined, so the song can only be determined once). For example, it is assumed that the music E is selected (determined) by the lottery of the start music when “Omakase” is selected with high probability and in a short time. Next, when the music is changed to another music (for example, music D) by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, the music D is output until the music is changed again. After that, when "Random" is again selected (determined) by the operation of the up and down buttons of the sub input button SB, the start song is also selected at this time. Also, since I have not touched on the big hit start demo time and the big hit end demo time, if you add it, in the big hit start demo time when it becomes a big hit from the time saving, it is selected because it introduces the big hit. Existing music is not output. However, in the big hit end demo time, if it is a big hit that can select songs in a series, the big hit end demo time is set short, and the selected music will continue to be output, and it will enter the time saving as it is. Become. Also, in promotion production that fuels whether or not the number of rounds is promoted (promotes whether it will be from 10th to 4th rounds), it is not possible to select a song during the promotion, and the song is selected after the promotion is successful or after it fails. It may be possible to select. From another point of view, even in the case of the same 10-round jackpot, the jackpot in which the promotion effect is executed has a period in which the song cannot be selected, and the jackpot in which the boost effect is not performed does not have the period in which the song cannot be selected. Can also be said. Furthermore, when a specific effect (an effect that erases the music selection screen) is executed instead of the reach effect, the music is changed by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, the specific effect is being generated. May be configured such that BGM dedicated to the specific effect is output, the specific effect ends, and the changed music starts to be output from the next variation start, or the specific effect ends (from the specific effect to the normal screen). It may be configured such that the output of the changed music is started when (returning).

  Next, the transition of the music and the background image in one change during the time saving will be described with reference to the “transition diagram of the music changing and the background changing during the time saving” in the lower part of the figure. First, at the start of fluctuation, the music A is selected, and the background image displays the character A corresponding to the music A. Next, during the change, the player operates the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 to change to the music D during the change. However, since the background image is not changed immediately, it remains the character A. Next, when the reach effect is developed, since the reach effect corresponding to the music A selected at the start of the change is performed, the BGM is also changed to the reach effect BGM corresponding to the music A. In other words, in the present embodiment, the reach effect corresponding to the selected song is developed, but since the reach effect is determined at the start of variation, even if the song is changed during the variation, it changes. The reach effect corresponding to the music selected at the start is executed. Next, when the reach effect is lost, the normal screen is restored during the change, but at this time BGM is not output (the music D may be output), and the background image is still the next change. Since there is no character, character A is used. Next, at the time when the next variation starts, the music piece D is displayed, and the character B is displayed as the background image. With this configuration, even if the music is changed immediately before the reach effect, the reach effect can be executed without any problem and without increasing the processing load during the change.

  Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 3800 in FIG. First, in step 3802, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new hold generation command (hold information relating to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) is received from the main control substrate M side. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3802, in step 3804, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the drawing suspension counter (in the present example, a maximum of four for the first main game and a maximum of four for the second main game). 1 ”is added (incremented). Next, in step 3806, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, the hold information (particularly, a random number value related to the main game symbol lottery, for example, win / win lottery). The random number / symbol lottery random number / variation mode lottery random number) is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to step 3816.

  On the other hand, if No in step 3802, in step 3808, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 3808, in step 3810, the CPU SC of the sub control board S subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing suspension counter. Next, in step 3812, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the pending information related to the symbol variation, and the remaining pending information. Next, in step 3814, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 3816. In addition, in the case of No in step 3808, the process of step 3810 to step 3814 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step 3816. Next, in step 3816, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display section SG12, the second hold display section SG13), hold display lamps of the same number as the drawing hold counter value. Is lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3900).

Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3900 in FIG. First, in step 3902, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 3902, in step 3904, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 3906, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the variation mode of the decorative pattern and temporarily stores it in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2550, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes an effect operation content determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3912, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4000). Even if No in step 3902, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4000).

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the effect operation content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 in FIG. 55. First, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the currently set light quantity level temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the referred light amount level is “high”. If Yes in step 2554, in step 2556, the CPU SC of the sub control board S refers to the effect operation content determination lottery table (effect table 0) based on the variation mode of the decorative symbol and the sub-side game state type. The pattern is determined by lottery, the determined effect pattern is set in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to step 2564. On the other hand, if No in step 2554, in step 2558 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the referred light amount level is “medium”. If Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the effect operation content determination lottery table (effect table 1) based on the variation mode of the decorative symbol and the sub-side game state type. The pattern is determined by lottery, the determined effect pattern is set in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to step 2564. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2558, in other words, when the light amount level is "small", in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces an effect based on the variation mode of the decorative symbol and the sub-side game state type. The effect pattern is determined by lottery with reference to the operation content determination lottery table (effect table 2), and the determined effect pattern is set in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to step 2564.

  Here, FIG. 57 (effect tables 0, 1, and 2) is an example of an effect operation content determination lottery table. In addition, in the following description, the case where the variation mode of the decorative design is “super reach” is illustrated, but the same applies to the variation mode of other decorative patterns. First, as shown in this example, the effect pattern in the present embodiment is one of the execution contents related to effect operations such as effect image reproduction timing, movable body accessory driving timing, and illumination lamp lighting / flashing timing. Is specified as. Then, the specified effect operation is configured to be executed based on the effect pattern determined based on the random number value acquired at an arbitrary timing. For example, when the variation mode of the decorative pattern is "super reach" and the acquired random number value is "100", the effect pattern "effect A-5" is determined. Then, based on the effect pattern "effect A-5", "effect image A-5" (for example, a series of moving images for enhancing the interest of the effect of decorative symbol change at the start of variation of the decorative symbol, so-called reach effect. 30 seconds after the start of the decorative pattern change, the operation of the "electrical decoration lamp (in this example, the game effect lamp D26)" is started, and after the decorative pattern change is started. After 55 seconds, the operation of the "movable body accessory (in this example, the movable body accessory YK)" is started. Here, each effect pattern in the present embodiment can be mainly classified into three types based on the design intention of the effect pattern (hereinafter, such classification is referred to as effect system).

First, the first type is "production system A (or base production)", and the production patterns classified into this type are the main production patterns in the pachinko game machine. Here, the main effect pattern means an effect pattern that influences the interest of the effect of the pachinko game machine, and more specifically, for example, the selection rate at the time of losing and the selection rate at the time of big hit are An example can be given in which both are configured to be high (in other words, an effect pattern that is a main route to a big hit). When designing such an effect pattern, in general, in order to improve the interest of the effect, in general, the driving timing of the movable body accessory, the lighting / flashing timing of the illumination lamp, or the disturbance assigned to the effect pattern. It takes a lot of time to design the numerical range.

  Next, the second type is "production system B (or referred to as accessory-based production)", and the production patterns classified into this type notify the player that the jackpot expectation is high. Becomes In addition, because it is designed with the intention of notifying that the jackpot expectation is high, it is designed so that the movable body accessory driving timing and the lighting / blinking timing of the illumination lamp are relatively increased compared to other classifications. It will be. In addition, in order to increase the expectation of a big hit, the selectivity in the case of losing may be extremely low and the selectivity in the case of hitting may be high.

  Next, the third type is "effect system C (or referred to as electric decoration-based effect)", and the effect patterns classified into this type are effect patterns that complement the effect systems A and B. . Further, since the design is intended to serve as a complement to the production systems A and B, the driving timing of the movable body accessory and the lighting / flashing timing of the illumination lamp are relatively reduced as compared with the production systems A and B. Will be designed. Regarding the jackpot expectation degree, there is a case where the selection rate at the time of losing is high and the selection rate at the time of hitting is extremely low.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the "production system A to C", a "production system D" is further provided. When the light amount level is "medium" or "small", the effect pattern classified into the "effect system D" is configured to be selected and is classified into the "effect system D". The effect pattern is the effect pattern with the lowest power consumption.

  Returning to the explanation of the flowchart in FIG. 56, next, in step 2564, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S, based on the determined effect pattern, effect image reproduction timing, movable body accessory operation timing, and illumination lamp lighting / Blinking operation timing (in this example, only the three types of timings are illustrated, but the timing is not limited to this, and may include, for example, audio reproduction timing, so-called sub-input button pressing timing, and the like), Execution content (for example, if it is an effect image, the image reproduction content of “effect image A-5”) is temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 3912). To do.

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process related to the subroutine of step 4000 in FIG. First, in step 4002, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 4002, in step 4004, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag. Next, in step 4006, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol variation flag. Next, in step 4009, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the mounting variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 4010. On the other hand, if No in step 4002, the process proceeds to step 4010.

  Next, in step 4010, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 4010, in step 4011 the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the timer value of the diagram variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 4012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the variation start timing of the decorative pattern has been reached. If Yes in step 4012, in step 4014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the variable display command of the decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub-sub-control section SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). , And proceeds to step 4026.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4012, in step 4016 the CPUS of the sub-control board S
C determines whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the decorative pattern has been reached. If Yes in step 4016, in step 4018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the decorative pattern (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side). Are transmitted) to step 4026.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4016, in step 4020, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the advance notice image or reach image display timing has been reached based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. To determine. If Yes in step 4020, in step 4022, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets an image display command related to the timing (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Then, the process proceeds to step 4026. On the other hand, if No in step 4020, the process proceeds to step 4026.

  Next, in step 4026, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the variation is a button effect execution variation {in this example, while the main game symbol is changing, the sub-input button SB or the lever SB-3 is operated. The symbol variation in which the effect (button effect) in which the notice effect can be executed based on that is executed is referred to as "button effect execution fluctuation", and a part of the symbol fluctuation in which the fluctuation time relating to the main game symbol is 60 seconds. Is a button effect execution variation}. As will be described later in detail, the button effects according to the present embodiment include a single push button effect, a continuous hit button effect, a long press button effect, and a hidden button effect. If Yes in step 4026, in step 2650, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a button effect execution process described later, and proceeds to step 4028. On the other hand, if No in step 4026, the process proceeds to step 4028. Next, in step 4028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation timing of the movable body accessory YK has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 4028, in step 4030, the CPU SC of the sub control substrate S starts driving the movable body accessory YK based on the predetermined operation content, and proceeds to step 4032. On the other hand, if No in step 4028, the process moves to step 4032. Next, in step 4032, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation timing of the illumination lamp has been reached. If Yes in step 4032, in step 4034, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the production electric decoration operation permission flag (a flag used in the electric lamp operation control processing of FIG. 68), and proceeds to step 4036. To do. On the other hand, if No in step 4032, the process moves to step 4036.

  Next, in step 4036, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol has stopped. If Yes in step 4036, in step 4038, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative pattern (transmits to the sub-sub-control section SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Be done). Next, in step 4040, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets (zero-clears) the mounting variation time timer. Next, in step 4042, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns off the effect operation in progress flag. Next, in step 4044, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol variation flag. Next, in step 4046, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a hold. If Yes in step 4046, in step 4048, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets (zero-clears) the non-gaming period measurement timer HY10t (increment timer) to start, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2900). To do. Even if No in step 4010, step 4036, or step 4046, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2900). In this way, in the present embodiment, when the main game symbol is stopped and there is no hold, it is determined that the non-gaming period has started.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the button effect execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2650 in FIG. First, in step 2652, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether the effect executed by the symbol variation is a single button press effect or a lever effect. In the case of Yes in step 2652, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the single-shot press effect execution process described later in step 4300, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). On the other hand, if No in step 2652, in step 2654, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the effect executed by the variation is a button repeated hit effect. If Yes in step 2654, in step 2750, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a continuous hit effect execution process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 4028).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2654, in step 2656, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the effect executed by the variation is a button long press effect. If Yes in step 2656, in step 2800 a long press effect execution process, which will be described later, is executed, and the process advances to the next process (process of step 4028). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2656, in step 2658 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the effect executed in the variation is a hidden button effect. If Yes in step 2658, in step 2850, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a hidden button effect execution process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). Also, in the case of No in step 2658, the process shifts to the next process (process of step 4028).

  Next, FIG. 60 is a single-shot press effect execution process (a single-button press effect (a single-press operation of the sub-input button SB)) and a lever effect (a single-press operation of the lever) according to the subroutine of step 4300 in FIG. 59. This process is executed when and are executed. } Is a flowchart. In addition, when the button single push effect is executed, the processing excluding the parentheses is executed (for example, in step 4302, it is determined whether or not the button is in a valid period), and when the lever single draw effect is executed, the parentheses are executed. The processing described therein is executed (for example, in step 4302, it is determined whether or not the lever is in the valid period). First, in step 4302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the button effective period (or the lever effective period). If Yes in step 4302, in step 4304, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays a one-shot button image (or lever image). Next, in step 4306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the automatic button flag is off. If Yes in step 4306, in step 4308, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB (or lever SB-3) has been operated. If Yes in step 4308, in step 4310, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed single-shot button image (or lever image), executes the cut-in effect, and executes the next process (step 4028). Process). Note that the cut-in effect (cut-in image) is an effect that suggests a big hit expectation degree of the design variation that is displayed for a short time, and is displayed in the front layer rather than the display of the decorative design (see FIG. 65). ). In addition, there are multiple types of cut-in effects, and the jackpot expectation differs depending on the type (for example, the background color is "red" → the jackpot expectation "large", the background color is "yellow" → the jackpot expectation "medium". , The background color is "blue" → the big hit expectation degree "small", etc.).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4308, in step 4312, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button effective period (or the lever effective period) has ended. If Yes in step 4312, in step 4314, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed single-shot button image (or lever image), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028).

If No in step 4306, in step 4316 the CPUS of the sub control board S is
C determines whether or not the sub input button SB (or lever SB-3) has been operated. If Yes in step 4316, in step 4318, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns off the automatic button flag. Next, in step 4320, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed single-shot button image (or lever image), executes the cut-in effect, and performs the next process (process of step 4028). Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4316, in step 4322, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the one-shot button effective period has ended. If Yes in step 4322, in step 4324, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S deletes the displayed single-shot button image (or lever image), executes the cut-in effect, and executes the next process (step 4028). Process). Even if No in step 4302, step 4312, or step 4322, the process moves to the next process (process in step 4028). As described above, when the automatic button flag is ON, the cut-in effect is executed at the timing when the button effective period ends, that is, the sub input button SB is operated at the timing when the button effective period ends. The same processing is performed (also referred to as an automatic button operation is performed). It should be noted that the automatic button operation execution timing in the single button press effect is not limited to this. For example, when the button effective period is 5 seconds, the automatic button operation execution timing is 3 seconds after the start of the effective period. It may be configured to.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the continuous hit effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2750 in FIG. First, in step 2752, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the button valid period. If Yes in step 2752, in step 2754 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays a continuous hit button image (an image that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the sub input button). Next, in step 2756, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the automatic button flag is off. If Yes in step 2756, in step 2758 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. If Yes in step 2758, in step 2760, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S is a button repeated hit effect (effect that is executed by repeatedly hitting the sub input button SB, for example, every time the sub input button SB is operated. Effect is generated), and the process proceeds to step 2762. On the other hand, if No in 2758, the process moves to step 2762.

  Next, in step 2762, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button repeated hit effect has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) in the button effective period. If Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed continuous hit button image, executes the cut-in effect, and shifts to the next process (process of step 4028). . On the other hand, if No in step 2762, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2766 whether or not the button effective period has ended. If Yes in step 2766, in step 2768, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed continuous hit button image, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028).

If No in step 2756, that is, if the automatic button flag is on, in step 2770, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. If Yes in step 2770, in step 2772, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns off the automatic button flag. Next, in step 2774, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the button repeated hit effect, and proceeds to step 2780. On the other hand, if No in step 2770, in step 2776 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the button effective period. If Yes in step 2776, in step 2778 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the button repeated hit effect at predetermined time intervals (0.1 seconds in this example) (when the automatic button flag is on, , 0.5 seconds after the start of the button effective period, 1 every 0.1 seconds
The one-time button repeated effect is executed), and the process proceeds to step 2780. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the automatic button flag is turned on, the button continuous hit effect is produced 0.5 seconds after the start of the button effective period (the button continuous hit does not require the player to operate the sub input button). Production) is executed at intervals of 0.1 seconds. In addition, the situation in which the automatic button flag is on and the button is in the valid period (or the automatic button flag is on and the button is in the valid period, and the player does not operate the sub input button SB When the player operates the sub input button SB in a situation in which the button repeated hit effect is being executed), the automatic button flag is turned off, and the player operates the sub input button SB for subsequent button hit effects. It will be executed by this.

  Next, in step 2780, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button repeated hit effect has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) in the button effective period. If Yes in step 2780, in step 2782, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed continuous hit button image, executes the cut-in effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). . On the other hand, if No in step 2780, in step 2784 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the button effective period has ended. If Yes in step 2784, in step 2786, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S erases the continuous hit button image displayed without executing the cut-in effect, and shifts to the next process (process of step 4028). . Even if No in step 2752, step 2776, step 2784, or step 2766, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028). In this example, as the effect mode of the button repeated hit effect, the cut-in effect is displayed when the sub input button SB is operated a predetermined number of times during the button effective period, but the invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a meter is displayed as a continuous hit button image, and each time the sub input button SB is operated during the button effective period, the meter lighting display is increased as a button continuous hit effect, and a predetermined number of times of sub display is performed during the button effective period. When the input button SB is operated, the indicator light of the meter becomes full, and then the cut-in effect may be displayed (so-called progressive button hitting effect). It should be noted that the cut-in effect may not be executed, and if the sub-input button SB is operated a predetermined number of times during the button effective period, it may be configured to display how much the current meter lighting display has increased. . In the case of such a configuration, it may be configured such that the more the number of lights of the meter is displayed, the higher the expectation of a big hit of the symbol variation.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the long press effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2800 in FIG. In step 2802, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the button valid period. If Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays a long press button image (an image prompting the player to long press the sub input button). Next, in step 2806, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the automatic button flag is off. If Yes in step 2806, in step 2808, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. If Yes in step 2808, in step 2810, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a button long press effect (an effect that is executed by pressing and holding the sub input button SB, for example, pressing the sub input button SB. Effect is generated while the process is being performed), and the process proceeds to step 2812. On the other hand, if No in step 2808, the process moves to step 2812.

Next, in step 2812, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button long press effect for a predetermined time is executed in the button effective period. If Yes in step 2812, in step 2814, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed long press button image, executes the cut-in effect, and shifts to the next process (process of step 4028). To do. On the other hand, if No in step 2812, in step 2816 C of the sub-control board S is displayed.
The PUSC determines whether the button validity period has expired. If Yes in step 2816, in step 2818, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed long press button image, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028).

  If No in step 2806, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines in step 2820 whether the sub input button SB is operated. If Yes in step 2820, in step 2822, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns off the automatic button flag. Next, in step 2824, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the button long press effect, and proceeds to step 2830. On the other hand, if No in step 2820, in step 2826 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the button valid period. If Yes in step 2826, in step 2828, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the button long press effect (when the automatic button flag is on, from the timing when 0.5 seconds has elapsed from the start of the button effective period, The button long press effect is executed), and the process proceeds to step 2830.

  Next, in step 2830, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button long-press effect for a predetermined time is executed during the button effective period. If Yes in step 2830, in step 2832, the CPU SC of the sub control substrate S erases the displayed long press button image, executes the cut-in effect, and shifts to the next process (process of step 4028). To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2830, in step 2834, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the button effective period has ended. If Yes in step 2834, in step 2836, the CPU SC of the sub control substrate S erases the long-press button image displayed without executing the cut-in effect, and shifts to the next process (process of step 4028). To do. Even if No in step 2802, step 2826, step 2834, or step 2816, the process moves to the next process (process in step 4028). In this example, as the effect mode of the button long press effect, the cut-in effect is displayed when the operation of the sub input button SB is maintained for a predetermined time during the button effective period. Is not limited, for example, a meter is displayed as a long press button image, the operation of the sub input button SB is maintained during the button effective period, and the meter is lit as a button long press effect every time the maintaining time elapses. When the sub input button SB is pressed and held for a predetermined time during the button effective period, the meter lighting display becomes full, and then the cut-in effect may be displayed ( The so-called progressive button press production). Even if the cut-in effect is not executed, when the sub input button SB is pressed for a predetermined time during the button effective period, it is possible to display how much the current meter lighting display has increased. Good. In the case of such a configuration, it may be configured such that the more the number of lights of the meter is displayed, the higher the expectation of a big hit of the symbol variation.

  Next, FIG. 63 is an execution image diagram of automatic button operation in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure shows the timing at which the automatic button operation can be executed when the single button press effect is executed (this example illustrates the case where the variation time is 60 seconds). Specifically, in the pattern variation of 60 seconds, the button effective period and the button automatic input (the automatic button flag is on, the cut-in effect, the button repeated hit effect, etc. are executed without operating the sub-input button SB. This is sometimes referred to as automatic button input). When the button single push effect is executed, the button automatic input is executed at the timing when the button effective period ends. The timing at which the button automatic input is executed is not limited to this, and may be configured, for example, at a timing in the middle of the button valid period.

Next, the lower part of FIG. 63 is an operation diagram showing the timing at which button automatic input can be executed in the case of button repeated hit effect or button long press effect. In the case of the button continuous hit effect or the button long press effect, the button automatic input is executed every 0.1 seconds from the timing 0.5 seconds after the start of the button effective period. . By configuring in this way, the button continuous hit effect or the button long press effect has an earlier execution timing of the button automatic input for the button effective period than the single button press effect, and for the period of the symbol fluctuation. The button validity period is configured to be delayed. In addition, in this example, the timing at which the button automatic input is executed by the pattern variation in which the button repeated hit effect and the button long press effect are executed is 0.5 seconds after the button effective period is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the button long press effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree is higher than when the button long press effect is executed, and the button automatic input related to the button continuous hit effect is performed. The timing may be 0.5 seconds after the button effective period is started, and the button automatic input timing related to the button long press effect may be the timing when the button effective period is started. Further, the button effective period related to the button long press effect may be configured to be delayed in the button effective period relative to the period of the symbol variation, as compared with the button effective period related to the button repeated hit effect.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol variation in which the button repeated hit production or the button long-pressing effect is executed is higher than the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol variation in which the single button push effect is executed. Has been done. That is, the button continuous hit effect with a high jackpot expectation degree or the button long press effect has a longer button effective period for the period of the pattern change than the single button press effect with a low jackpot expected degree, and the button automatic operation during the button effective period The input execution timing will be earlier.

  Even with the same single button push effect, the automatic input timing (the same effect as when the sub input button SB is operated without operating the sub input button SB = cut-in effect depending on whether the jackpot is expected or not) May be configured to have different timings). Specifically, after the reach is started, as compared with the case where the serif notice (the notice effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation degree) is executed by pressing the sub input button SB once in the button effective period before the reach is started. When the cut-in effect (preliminary effect with relatively high jackpot expectation) is executed by pressing the sub input button SB once during the button effective period, the automatic input timing is later than the timing during the button effective period. (The timing may be the previous timing, and the automatic input timing in the button effective period may be different due to the different jackpot expectation). Further, such a configuration is not limited to a single button press effect, and may be applied to a button continuous hit effect, a button long press effect, a lever effect, and a hidden button effect. Even with the same single-button press effect, the earlier the start timing of the button effective period is, the later the automatic input timing in the button effective period is (the earlier timing may be used, and the start timing of the button effective period is different. It suffices that the automatic input timings differ depending on the button valid period). Further, such a configuration is not limited to a single button press effect, and may be applied to a button continuous hit effect, a button long press effect, a lever effect, and a hidden button effect.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the hidden button effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2850 in FIG. First, in step 2852, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S operates the sub-input button SB by changing the design to execute the button effective period (button single push effect, button continuous hit effect, button long press effect, or hidden button effect. Is received) = a period in which the effect is executed by operating the sub input button SB). If Yes in step 2852, in step 2854 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. If Yes in step 2854, in step 2856, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the button repeated hit effect. Next, in step 2858, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the continuous hit button image, and proceeds to step 2860. On the other hand, if No in step 2854, the process moves to step 2860. As described above, when the hidden button effect is executed, the image prompting the player to repeatedly press the sub input button SB is not displayed, but the player operates the sub input button SB during the button effective period to display the continuous hit button image. In addition, the button repeated hit effect is executed. More specifically, when the player operates the sub input button SB during the button effective period, a meter is displayed as a continuous hit button image, and an effect in which the meter that is lit increases as a button continuous hit effect is executed. The Rukoto.

  Next, in step 2860, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the continuous hit button image is displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2860, in step 2862, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the button repeated hit effect has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) in the button effective period. If Yes in step 2862, in step 2864 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed continuous hit button image and displays the lever image. Next, in step 2866, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the lever valid flag, and proceeds to the processing of step 2872.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2860 or step 2862, in step 2868 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the button effective period has ended. If Yes in step 2868, in step 2870 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed continuous hit button image (if the continuous hit button image is not displayed, the process is not executed), and in step 2872. Move to. Even if No in Step 2852 or Step 2868, the process proceeds to Step 2872.

  Next, in step 2872, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the lever valid flag is on. If Yes in step 2872, in step 2874, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the lever SB-3 has been operated during the lever valid period. If Yes in step 2874, in step 2876 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed lever image and executes the cut-in effect, and proceeds to step 2880. On the other hand, if No in step 2874, in step 2878 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the lever effective period has ended. If Yes in step 2878, the process moves to step 2880. Next, in step 2880, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the lever valid flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). Even if No in step 2872 or step 2878, the process moves to the next process (process in step 4028). In the present embodiment, the automatic button flag is not switched on / off even if the sub input button SB is operated during the symbol variation for executing the hidden button effect. With such a configuration, for example, when the player operates the sub input button SB in order to make the meter appear as a hidden button effect in a situation where the automatic button flag is on, the automatic button flag is turned off. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that is different from the player's intention. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, in the symbol variation for executing the hidden button effect, even if the automatic button flag is on, the automatic button operation is not executed, that is, the player himself or herself. Unless the sub input button SB is operated, the continuous hit button image display and the button continuous hit effect are not executed.

Next, FIG. 65 is an example of a hidden button effect image diagram in the gaming machine according to the present example. First, the super reach effect is started in a certain symbol variation, and the effect display of the button image is not displayed. Next, when the sub-input button SB is pressed in a situation where the button image is not displayed, a display that urges the player to perform a continuous tapping operation together with the button repeated tapping effect (displayed on the meter) as a hidden button effect (in this example, The message “Smash repeatedly !!” is displayed. Next, the sub input button SB is repeatedly hit, and the meter is filled up by pressing the sub input button SB a predetermined number of times. Next, by pressing the sub input button SB a predetermined number of times, the display of the meter is erased, a lever image is displayed, and a display prompting the player to operate the lever (in this example, "pull the lever !!"). Display) is displayed. Then, by operating the lever SB-3, the cut-in image is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the jackpot pattern is stopped as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. As described above, when the hidden button effect is executed, even if the automatic button flag is turned on, automatic button input is not executed, that is, unless the player operates the sub input button SB repeatedly by himself, the meter and lever images are displayed. , The cut-in effect will not be displayed. The execution mode of the hidden button effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIG.
(1) When the reach effect is started and the button image is not displayed, the meter is displayed by operating the sub input button SB repeatedly.
(2) After that, the sub input button SB is repeatedly operated and the indicator light of the meter is filled up, so that the display of “Lever effect preparation” is displayed large (to a size that occupies more than half of the display area SG10). Display),
(3) After that, the display of “Lever effect preparation in progress” becomes smaller, and moves to the lower right of the display area SG10,
(4) After that, in the final stage of the reach production, a winning branch production as a production that executes a single button press or lever operation {This is a production that suggests a big hit expectation degree of the pattern variation being executed, for example, "press the button to complete the accessory. "Sasero!" Display, cut-in effect, single button push or single lever pull to complete the specific symbols that are not numbers, single button push or single lever pull to stop the jackpot pattern ( (Temporary stop) (or not all) is executed.
(5) When the lever operation is urged in the winning / branching effect, “Lever preparing” is displayed again in a large size, and then “Lever preparing” is erased and the lever image is displayed. (When executing the winning / branching effect, it is preferable to configure so that the big hit expectation of the symbol variation being executed is higher when the lever image is displayed than when the button image is displayed. , When the button image is displayed, the sub input button SB is operated, and when the lever image is displayed, the lever SB-3 is operated).
(6) The winning / branching branch effect is an effect of operating the lever SB-3, and when the cut-in effect is executed by operating the lever SB-3, the jackpot expectation degree among the plurality of cut-in effects that exist. The lowest cut-in effect is not executed, or if the cut-in effect with the lowest jackpot expectation among the plurality of existing cut-in effects is executed, the symbol fluctuation that is being executed will be a big hit. It may be configured to be.
(7) In addition, there are a plurality of types (for example, a plurality of types of display colors) of button images (and lever images) in the winning / branching effect (the expectation of a big hit varies depending on the type of button image), and the button effective period (and When an indicator display indicating the lever effective period) is displayed, the indicator display also corresponds to the type of button image (and lever image) (for example, the button display is “blue”, “red”, “ The degree of expectation of the jackpot of the pattern changes in execution in the order of "Kirin pattern", "Rainbow" is increasing ("Rainbow" is a big hit confirmation), and the color of the indicator (display indicating the button effective period or the lever effective period) is also It may be "blue", "red", "kirin pattern", or "rainbow" according to the color of the button display}. The indicator has a "bar" shape in which the display portion becomes shorter as the button valid period (or the lever valid period) elapses, and the display portion of the "bar" is the button valid period (or, It indicates the remaining time of the lever effective period). In addition, the color of the effect (the effect mode in which light gathers and the button appears) just before the button image (and the lever image) appears is in the order of “blue”, “red”, “kirin pattern”, and “rainbow”. The expectation and execution related to which type of button image (and lever image) is displayed depending on whether the jackpot expectation of the pattern change being executed is getting higher ("rainbow" is a jackpot confirmed)} The degree of expectation of big hits in the middle design changes.
It may be configured as described above.

Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing relating to the subroutine of step 2900 in FIG. First, in step 2902, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command is received from the main side. If Yes in step 2904, in step 2912, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns on the special game flag. Next, in step 2914, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S issues a command related to the big hit start display on the effect display device SG (transmitted to the sub-sub-control section SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Set (perform based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2915, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets the sub-game state type to the special game effect mode, and proceeds to step 2916. Even if No in step 2902, the process proceeds to step 2916. Next, in step 2916, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing of step 2999). To do.

  Next, in step 2926, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2926, in step 2928, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the big hit end display (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). . Next, in step 2930, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the special game flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 4400). Even if No in step 2904 or step 2926, the process moves to the next process (process in step 4400).

  Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the background image display processing relating to the subroutine of step 4400 in FIG. First, in step 4402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state has transitioned from the non-time shortened gaming state to the time shortened gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 4402, in step 4404, the CPU SC of the sub control board S sets the time saving effect mode to the sub side game state type. Next, in step 4406, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the background image for the time saving effect mode on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 4500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4402, in step 4408, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current game state has shifted from the time-reduced game state to the non-time-reduced game state. If Yes in step 4408, in step 4410, the CPU SC of the sub control board S sets the normal effect mode as the sub game state type. Next, in step 4412, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the background image for the normal effect mode on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 4500). Even if No in step 4408, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4500).

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the illumination lamp operation control process according to the subroutine of step 4500 in FIG. In step 4502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an error leaving instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 4502, in step 4504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S acquires the type of error that has occurred (in this example, a door opening error, a tray full error, a vibration detection error, or an illegal radio wave detection error). To do. Next, in step 4510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness based on the type of error and the current light amount level (in this example, large / medium / small) (illumination table 1 Together with the above), the determined contents are temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 4512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the error illumination decoration operation flag, and proceeds to step 4514. Even if No in step 4502, the process proceeds to step 4514.

Next, in step 4514, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the error illumination operation in progress flag is on. If Yes in step 4514, in step 4516, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined illumination lamp (eg , A predetermined part of the game effect lamp D26) is lit. Next, in step 4518, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an error leaving cancellation command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 4518, in step 4520, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the error illumination in-operation flag, and proceeds to step 4522. Even if No in step 4514 or step 4518, the process moves to step 4522.

  Next, in step 4522, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the error illumination decorative flag is off. If Yes in step 4522, in step 4524, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the effect electric decoration operation permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4524, in step 4526, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns off the production decorative light operation permission flag. Next, in step 4528, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness based on the effect system and the current light amount level (see the illumination table 2), and the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Temporarily store (set) in. Next, in step 4530, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the production decorative light in-execution flag, and proceeds to step 4532. On the other hand, if No in step 4524, the process moves to step 4532.

  Next, in step 4532, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the effect illumination decorative operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4532, in step 4534, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, performs a predetermined lighting operation of the illumination lamp. To execute. Next, in step 4536, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not all the scheduled lighting operations have been completed. In the case of Yes in step 4536, in step 4538, the CPU SC of the sub control substrate S turns off the production illumination decoration operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3250).

  Further, in the case of No in step 4532, in step 4540, the CPU SC of the sub control substrate S determines whether or not the effect operation in progress flag is off. If Yes in step 4540, in step 4542, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness based on the current sub-side game state type and the light amount level (see the illumination table 3), The determined contents are temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Next, at 4544, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a predetermined lighting operation of the illumination lamp based on the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Processing (processing of step 3250). Even if No in step 4522, step 4536, or step 4540, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3250).

Next, FIG. 69 is an example of an illumination lamp lighting pattern determination reference table according to the present example. First, the illumination table 1 is an illumination table that is referred to when an error occurs. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the lighting pattern of the illumination lamp is configured such that the lighting period → the extinguishing period is one cycle, and the one cycle is repeated a predetermined number of times (including the case where there is no limit on the number of times). There is. In addition, the brightness of the illumination lamp during the lighting period is determined based on any of a predetermined number of steps (10 steps in this example) (in this example, the brightness of the illumination lamp is brightness 1 < Brightness 2 << ... << higher in the order of brightness 10). The lighting pattern and the brightness of the illumination lamp are configured to differ depending on the type of error and the current light intensity level. In this example, the lighting brightness (and lighting pattern) of the illumination lamp can be different depending on the set light amount level even when an error occurs, but the invention is not limited to this, and the setting is performed when an error occurs. The illumination lamp may be constantly lit with a constant lighting brightness (and lighting pattern) regardless of the level of light quantity being applied.

  Next, the illumination table 2 is an illumination table that is referred to during the rendering operation. As shown in this example, the configuration relating to the lighting pattern and the brightness of the illumination lamp is the same as that of the illumination table 1. In addition, the lighting pattern and the brightness of the illumination lamp are configured to be different depending on the effect system and the current light amount level.

  Next, the illumination table 3 is an illumination table that is referred to when the game state is notified. As shown in this example, the configuration relating to the lighting pattern and the brightness of the illumination lamp is the same as that of the illumination table 1. Further, the lighting pattern and the brightness of the illumination lamp are configured to be different for each sub-side game state type and the current light amount level.

  In the present embodiment, the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness of the illumination lamp may be different due to the difference in the light amount level, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light amount level is different. The lighting pattern of the illumination lamp may not be different, and only the lighting brightness of the illumination lamp may be different. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness of the illumination lamp when an error occurs may be different due to the different light amount levels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when an error occurs, May be configured to determine the lighting pattern and lighting brightness of the illuminated lamp based on only the type of error that has occurred, regardless of the light intensity level. The lighting pattern of the illumination lamp may always be a predetermined pattern, and the lighting brightness of the illumination lamp may be a predetermined brightness.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flow chart of the volume control processing according to the subroutine of step 3250 in FIG. First, in step 3252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the volume determination timing (for example, when the jackpot starts, when the fluctuation starts, when the standby demo screen starts, when the volume switch is changed, or when the volume level is changed). ) Is determined. If Yes in step 3252, in step 3254, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an error notification instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 3254, in step 3256, the CPUSC of the sub control board S acquires the type of error that has occurred. Next, in step 3258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the volume based on the type of error and the volume switch status (see error volume determination table), and the determined content is stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Is temporarily stored (set) in, and the process proceeds to step 3262.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3254, in step 3260, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the volume to be output based on the volume switch status and the determined volume level (see non-error volume determination table). The determined contents are temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub control board S, and the process proceeds to step 3262. Even if No in step 3252, the process proceeds to step 3262. Next, in step 3262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S outputs a sound based on the determined (set) sound volume, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

Next, FIG. 71 (non-error volume determination table) is an example of a table for determining the volume output from the gaming machine in the non-error state in the gaming machine according to the present example. The volume level according to the present example is set in five levels from level 1 to level 5, and the player can set the volume level by determining the volume level. Further, the volume switch is set in three stages of large, medium, and small, and is configured so that only the administrator can set it (for example, it cannot be changed without opening the door D18). In this example, the maximum volume (dB) output from the gaming machine is determined by the volume level and the volume switch. For example, when the volume level is set to "level 3" and the volume switch is set to "medium", the maximum output volume dB is "95 dB". When the volume switch is “low” and the volume level is “level 1” or “level 2” or in the demo screen mode, the volume is fixed at “1” which is the minimum volume value. It Further, the volume corresponding to the volume level is the same when the volume switch is “high” and when the volume switch is “medium” (when the volume level is the same, the volume is the same). Exist). With this configuration, since the volume varies depending on the type of sound to be output, the maximum volume is set to the same value and only the minimum volume (volume level 1 and volume level 2 when the volume switch is “small”) is set. ) Can be adjusted so that the volume level does not vary from product to product.

  Next, FIG. 71 (error volume determination table) is an example of a table that determines the volume output from the gaming machine at the time of an error in the gaming machine according to the present example. The volume at the time of error is configured so that the player cannot set it (so that it is determined regardless of the volume level), and only the administrator can set it with the volume switch. The abscissa indicates the error mode (in this example, a door opening error, a tray full error, a vibration detection error, and an illegal radio wave detection error are illustrated). With the volume switch on the vertical axis, the maximum volume (dB) output from the gaming machine is determined. For example, when the error type is “vibration detection error” and the volume switch is set to “small”, the maximum output volume dB is “78 dB”. Since the illegal radio wave detection error is a highly dangerous error, it is always fixed at "95 dB" which is the maximum volume regardless of not only the volume level but also the setting of the volume switch. With such a configuration, the volume level for notifying the error of the gaming machine cannot be customized by the player, and the volume of the unauthorized radio wave detection error, which is a high-risk error, is always the maximum volume. It is configured to be output by. In the present embodiment, the volume when an error occurs is configured to be determined based on the type of error that has occurred and the status of the volume switch, but the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the status of the volume switch. Alternatively, the volume may be varied only depending on the type of error that has occurred, or the volume may always be maximized when an error occurs, regardless of the status of the volume switch and the type of error that has occurred.

  With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the player operates the operation members without operating the operation members (sub input button SB, cross key SB-2, lever SB-3). The same effect as in the case of performing is performed (automatic button input is performed), and the setting related to volume, the setting related to light amount, and the automatic button operation setting can be changed. In addition, as a change mode of the setting related to the light amount and the automatic button operation setting, an element that can be changed by the player and an element that can be changed only by the manager are provided, and a changeable state or an unchangeable state (button effect) It is user-friendly and entertaining because it is possible to customize the game machine according to the player's taste without impairing the game playability by providing different situations (such as middle) and different changing methods (non-playing and playing). It can be a high-performance gaming machine.

(Modification 1 from the present embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, at the time of executing the button effect, it is possible to perform automatic button setting, which means that the same effect as when the player operates the operation member is executed even if the player does not operate the operation member. However, the operation mode of the operation member related to the button effect is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration in which an operation mode of the operation member at the time of executing a button effect different from that of the present embodiment is applied will be described as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 72 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the first modification from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is step 3500 (variant 1), that is, after the volume control processing is executed in step 3250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will be described later in step 3500 (variant 1). The right hitting instruction display control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2999.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the non-gaming period control processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 72 in the first modification from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 2166 (Mod 1) and Step 2168 (Mod 1), that is, if a new main game suspension has not occurred in Step 2156, Step 2166 (Mod 1), The CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the auxiliary game suspension has newly occurred. In the case of Yes in step 2166 (variation 1), the non-gaming period measurement timer HY10t is stopped and reset in step 2168 (variation 1), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3600). Even if No in Step 2162 (Modification 1), the process proceeds to the next process (process in Step 3600). In this way, in the first modification from the present embodiment, when the operation of the firing handle D44 is detected, when the symbol variation starts, when a new main game hold occurs, and when a new auxiliary game hold occurs. When occurs, it is determined that the non-gaming period has ended, and the non-gaming period measuring timer HY10t will be reset. At the time of resetting, when the operation of the firing handle D44 is detected, and the symbol variation Depending on whether the main game is suspended or not, the standby demo screen, the first customization guide screen, the second customization guide screen, the customization execution screen, the light intensity adjustment screen, and the volume adjustment screen are displayed. On the other hand, when the auxiliary game hold is newly generated while being erased, the standby demo screen, the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, the customization screen Execution screen, the display of the light amount adjustment screen and volume control screen is configured so as not to be erased. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the condition for shifting to the standby demo screen is that the non-game period measurement timer value is the demo start value (240 seconds) or more, and the non-game period measurement timer The measurement of the value is started = the non-gaming period is started at the timing when the gaming machine customization setting is changed (determined) and the timing when the symbol fluctuation is stopped and the main game suspension is not present. There is. The condition for resetting the non-game period measurement timer value is that the symbol variation has started, the operation of the firing handle D44 has been detected, the main game hold has occurred, or the auxiliary game hold has occurred (the auxiliary game start opening H10 It may be that the game ball has passed). Further, the condition for ending the display of the standby demo screen is two or more of the detection of the operation of the firing handle D44, the start of the symbol variation, the occurrence of the main game hold, and the occurrence of the auxiliary game hold, which are shown in FIG. The condition may be satisfied, and in such a case, it is preferable that the two or more satisfied conditions include the start of the symbol variation.

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the right-hand hitting instruction display control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 (variation 1) in FIG. 72 in the first modification from the present embodiment. First, in step 3502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a special game is being executed. If Yes in step 3502, the process moves to step 3508. On the other hand, if No in step 3502, in step 3504, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 3504, in step 3505 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the non-gaming period measurement timer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 seconds in this example). If Yes in step 3505, in step 3506, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 has been detected. If Yes in step 3506, the process moves to step 3510. Even if No in step 3505, the process proceeds to step 3510. On the other hand, if No in step 3506, in step 3508 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display, and the next processing (processing of step 2999) ). Further, in step 3510, the CPUS of the sub control board S is
C sets the command for displaying the first right-handing instruction display, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2999). Here, the upper right part of the figure is a display image diagram of the right-handing instruction display. As shown in the figure, in the first modification from the present embodiment, the player is right-handed (a game method of launching a game ball toward the right side of the game board surface, and the launch strength of the launch handle D44 is set to be relative). As a display on the effect display device SG that urges the player to right-stroke, the two right-stroke instruction displays, that is, a first right-stroke instruction display and a second right-stroke instruction display are provided. In addition, the second right-handing instruction display has a larger display area than the first right-handing instruction display, and is configured so as to be easily visible (conspicuous) to the player. With this configuration, the first right-hand striking instruction display is displayed when it is desired to emphasize the effect caused by the change in the design, and when it is disadvantageous to the player if the right-hand striking is not executed, etc. The second right-handing instruction display (or both the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display may be displayed) can be configured to be displayed.

  If No in step 3504, in step 3512, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S deletes the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display (for a right-handing instruction display not displayed). Do not execute the process) Set the command. Next, in step 3513, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the non-gaming period measurement timer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 seconds in this example). If Yes in step 3513, in step 3514, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 has been detected. If Yes in step 3514, in step 3516, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S produces a predetermined effect (an effect that is executed only when the firing handle D44 is operated, for example, “Fight!” Is displayed). The command to be displayed on the display device SG is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Note that in the case of No in step 3513 or step 3514, the process shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999) without executing the predetermined effect. Thus, in the first modification from the present embodiment, the predetermined time (5 seconds) has passed since the non-gaming state, and the non-time shortening gaming state, and the special game is being executed. If the firing handle D44 is operated in other cases, a predetermined effect that can be executed only when the firing handle D44 is operated is configured to be executable. The predetermined time may be longer than 5 seconds (for example, 30 seconds), or the time when the standby demo screen starts to be displayed (for example, 240 seconds, and the firing handle D44 is operated during the execution of the standby demo. The predetermined effect may be executed by doing so, or the time (for example, 900 seconds) at which the display of the standby demo screen ends, and the predetermined effect can be obtained by operating the firing handle D44 after the end of the display of the standby demo. May be performed). In addition, when a predetermined time (5 seconds) has passed since the non-gaming state, the game is in the time reduction gaming state, and the firing handle D44 is operated when the special game is not being executed, Both the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display are displayed. There may be a plurality of types of the predetermined effects, and it may be configured to determine which effect is to be executed by lottery.

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the continuous hit effect execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2750 in FIG. 59 in the first modification from the present embodiment. First, in step 2788-1, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is currently in the button continuous hit effective period (the period in which the continuous hit effect is displayed by pressing the sub input button SB). If Yes in step 2788-1, the continuous hit button image is displayed in step 2788-2. Next, in step 2788-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been newly pressed and held (the state of the sub input button SB being turned on → on and then on). It is determined that the button has been held down for 0.5 second). If Yes in step 2788-3, in step 2788-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the automatic continuous hitting valid flag (if the flag is on and the button continuous hitting valid period is reached, the The continuous hit effect is to be executed) and the process proceeds to step 2788-5. Even if No in step 22788-3, the process proceeds to step 2788-5.

  Next, at step 2788-5, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the automatic continuous hitting effective flag is on. If Yes in step 2788-5, in step 2788-6, the automatic continuous hit effect is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2788-9. The automatic continuous hit effect is an effect-like effect that occurs when the player presses the sub input button SB for a long time, which overlaps with the continuous hit button image. The player presses the sub input button SB for a long time. If continued, one continuous hit effect is continuously executed (effect occurs) every 0.2 seconds. In addition, the effect mode of the automatic continuous hit effect is the same as the effect mode of the single shot successive hit effect described later, and may be collectively referred to as the continuous hit effect. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2788-5, in step 2788-7, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a single push operation on the sub input button SB (the sub input button SB is turned off → on. If it is turned off again without continuing for 0.5 seconds after that, it is determined that a single press operation has been performed). If Yes in step 2788-7, in step 2788-8, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the single-shot continuous striking effect, and proceeds to step 2788-9. Also in the case of No in step 2788-7, the processing shifts to step 2788-9. It should be noted that the single-shot continuous hit effect is an effect-like effect that occurs when the player presses the sub-input button SB once, which overlaps the continuous-shot button image, and the player hits the sub-input button SB once. Each time the push is executed once, the continuous hit effect is executed (the effect is generated). Next, in step 2788-9, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined number of continuous stroke effects have been executed in one button continuous stroke effective period. It should be noted that the predetermined number of consecutive hits means that a total number of the number of consecutive hit effects executed in the automatic consecutive hit effect and the number of consecutive hit effects performed in the single shot hit effect is a predetermined number, and this example Has been 10 times. If Yes in step 2788-9, the process moves to step 2790-2. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2788-9, in step 2790-1, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets the end timing of the button repeated hit effective period (in this example, 4 seconds after the start timing of the button repeated hit effective period). It is determined whether it has arrived. If Yes in step 2790-1, the process proceeds to step 2790-2, and if No, the process proceeds to step 2790-7. Next, in step 2790-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the cut-in effect, and proceeds to step 2790-7.

  Further, in the case of No in step 2788-1, in step 2790-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S currently displays the automatic continuous hit acceptance period (by continuously pressing the sub input button SB, continuous hit effects are continuously displayed. It is a different period). In addition, in this example, the automatic continuous hit acceptance period is provided even in the period other than the button continuous hit valid period in the symbol variation period, but the invention is not limited to this, and the automatic continuous hit acceptance period is not in the button continuous hit valid period. May be configured not to be provided, or in some symbol variations, it may be configured to always have a button continuous hit valid period and an automatic continuous hit acceptance period, for example, a non-stochastic fluctuation game state and a non-time shortened game state When the time fluctuates, the pattern fluctuates for a predetermined time or longer, and the pattern fluctuates for a predetermined time or less, the button continuous hit valid period and the automatic continuous hit acceptance period may always be set. Also, except for some situations, it may be set as the button continuous hit valid period and the automatic continuous hit acceptance period, for example, during the big hit start demonstration time, the big hit end demo time, during the fixed fixed time, the button continuous hit valid period is always set. In addition, the automatic continuous hitting period may be set. Further, the period in which the sub-input button SB is long pressed may be set as the automatic continuous hit acceptance period (the button continuous hit valid period is a part of the period during which the symbol variation in which the continuous hit effect is executed is changed). If Yes in step 2790-3, in step 2790-4, the CPU SC of the sub control board S displays the continuous hit button image. Next, in step 2790-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been newly pressed. If Yes in step 2790-5, in step 2790-6, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the automatic continuous hitting effective flag, and proceeds to step 2790-7. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2790-3 or step 2790-5, the process proceeds to step 2790-7.

  Next, in step 2790-7, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the automatic continuous hitting valid flag is on. If Yes in step 2790-7, in step 2790-8, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB is off (may be whether or not the button has been pressed for a long time). . If Yes in step 2790-8, in step 2790-9, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns off the automatic continuous hitting valid flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). Even if No in step 2790-7 or step 2790-8, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028).

  Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the button effect execution period. In the same figure, the symbol variation in which the button repeated striking effect, which is a variation time of 60 seconds, is executed is illustrated. First, the sub-input button SB is disabled for 3 seconds after the symbol variation is started, and the decorative symbol is varied. After that, the automatic continuous hit acceptance period starts from the timing 3 seconds after the start of the symbol fluctuation. It should be noted that the button repeated hit valid period has not yet started at this timing. After that, after 2 seconds, the first button repeated effective period is started (the button repeated effective period is provided three times for one symbol variation). As described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, the automatic repeated hit acceptance period is provided before the start timing of the first repeated button effective period, and for example, the start of the first repeated button effective period is started. Even if the long press of the sub input button SB is started 1 second before the timing, the automatic continuous stroke effect is started from the start timing of the first button continuous stroke effective period. After that, the automatic button repeated acceptance period continues although the first button repeated effective period ends 4 seconds after the start timing of the first button repeated effective period. After that, from the end timing of the first button continuous hit valid period, the button continuous hit valid period ends for 2 seconds, then the second button continuous hit valid period ends for 4 seconds, and then the second button continuous hit valid period ends for 2 seconds. It is configured such that it is not the valid period, and then the third consecutive button valid period is 4 seconds. Further, the automatic continuous hit acceptance period continues until the end timing of the third button continuous hit valid period. As described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, three button repeated hit valid periods are provided for each symbol change, and the automatic repeated hit acceptance period is from the start timing of the first button repeated hit valid period. Is also provided continuously from the timing of 2 seconds before the end timing of the third button continuous hit valid period, that is, a certain button continuous hit valid period and the next button continuous hit valid period (for example, the first button continuous hit valid period). The automatic continuous hit acceptance period is also a period which is not the button continuous hit valid period between the period and the second button continuous hit valid period). The automatic continuous striking effect is not executed even if the sub input button is long-pressed during the variation of the design for executing the hidden button effect. In this example, the automatic continuous stroke effect is executed when the long press of the sub input button SB is started in the automatic continuous stroke acceptance period provided before the effective button continuous stroke period. The present invention is not limited to this, and if the long press of the sub input button SB is started before the button continuous hit effective period, the automatic continuous hit effect may not be executed.

  With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment, the player continuously hits the sub input button by pressing and holding the sub input button when executing the button effect (during button hitting effect). By configuring the automatic continuous hit function that will produce the same effect as when operated, and setting the automatic continuous hit acceptance period before the button continuous hit valid period, the automatic continuous hit function is turned on. In this situation, even if the sub input button is pressed and held at a timing earlier than the button continuous hit effective period, the automatic continuous hit effect is executed so that the sub input is performed before the button continuous hit effective period. User-friendly in that all continuous strokes will be executed if you press and hold the button, and you do not have to perform continuous strokes. It is possible to the gaming machine for rendering on the effect display device upon execution of interest highly button repeated pressing effect, it becomes possible to more attention player.

  In addition, in the modification example 1 from the present embodiment, the automatic continuous hit effect is configured to be executed every 0.2 seconds at the time of executing the automatic continuous hit effect, but the execution mode of the automatic continuous hit effect is not limited to this. In the gaming machine configured such that the automatic continuous hit effect can be executed even when the hidden button effect is changed, the execution intervals of the automatic continuous hit effect may be changed when the effect to be executed is different. Specifically, when the hidden button effect is executed, the automatic continuous hit effect is executed every 0.5 seconds, whereas when the hidden button effect is executed, the automatic continuous hit effect is executed every 0.2 seconds. Good. In the case of such a configuration, the start timing of the button continuous hit effective period in the hidden button effect may be provided after the execution start timing of the reach effect, or the button continuous hit effect period in the hidden button effect may be performed. It may be configured such that it is longer than the button continuous hit effective period in. Further, as the button continuous hit production, there are a button continuous hit effect A and a button continuous hit effect B. When the button continuous hit effect A is executed, the automatic continuous hit effect is executed every 0.5 seconds, whereas the button continuous hit effect B is executed. Sometimes, the automatic continuous hit effect may be executed every 0.2 seconds (the execution interval of the automatic continuous hit effect differs depending on the type of the continuous button hit effect). In the case of such a configuration, the button effective period of the button repeated effect A and the button effective period of the button repeated effect B may have different effective periods. In addition, the button repeated hit production A and the button repeated hit production B may be configured so that the predetermined number of times (the number of consecutive hit operations for which the cut-in effect is executed) in step 2788-9 is different. When configured, the continuous button effect A and the continuous button effect B may be configured so that the execution intervals of the automatic continuous effect are different.

  Next, FIG. 76 is an example of a display priority applicable to the gaming machine of this example. In the figure, the display contents that can be displayed on the effect display device SG are listed. Those with a high display priority are shown in the upper row, and those with a low display priority are shown in the lower row. In addition, when the display content with the high display priority and the display content with the low display priority are displayed in an overlapping manner, specifically, for example, when the right-handing instruction display and the decorative pattern are displayed in an overlapping manner, Regarding the display of the overlapping portion, a right-handing instruction display having a high display priority is displayed on the front side (displayed so as to be visible), and a decorative pattern having a low display priority is displayed on the back side ( It becomes invisible because it is hidden by the right-handed instruction display). In addition, from the highest display priority in this example, "error display → right hitting instruction display → power saving display → standby demo screen → song selection screen display → customization execution screen display → customization guide screen display (automatic button operation setting Screen) → volume / light intensity adjustment screen display → customization guide screen display (volume / light intensity) → spec band display → traffic light → second decorative design → decorative design → hold display. With the second decorative design, the normal decorative design (referred to as the first decorative design) may be hidden in order to show the moving image to the player when super reach or the like is executed, Also in the case of displaying the decorative pattern in the corner of the display area SG10 and the like so that the player can recognize the reach of which decorative pattern from the viewpoint of user-friendliness, the display of the second decorative pattern. The display area of the first decorative pattern is configured to be larger than the area. The display priority may be changed. For example, “error display → right hitting instruction display → power saving display → song selection screen display → customization executing screen display → spec band display → standby demo screen → customization guide screen display (Automatic button operation setting screen) → volume / light intensity adjustment screen display → customization guide screen display (volume / light intensity) → traffic light → second decorative pattern → holding display → decorative pattern ”. However, regarding "error display", "right-handed instruction display", and "power saving display", it is not desirable to change the display priority because it greatly affects the profit of the player. Further, regarding the "decorative design" and the "hold display", the display priority is different between the non-gaming period (non-gaming period measuring timer HY10t> 0) and the game (non-gaming period measuring timer HY10t = 0). However, for example, in the non-gaming period, the display priority is high, and the display is “decorative pattern → hold display”, while in the game, the display priority is high, The display may be changed from "holding display to decorative pattern". With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot visually confirm the hold display when the hold display changes as the hold prefetching effect while the decorative pattern is changing.

  Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram of a hidden button effect applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. In the figure, in a certain symbol variation, the first half super reach effect and the second half reach effect are configured to be executed. As a specific example of execution of the super-reach first half effect and the super-reach second-half effect, the super-reach first-half effect is executed in a pattern variation related to a certain loss, and the lose symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the super-reach first-half effect. To do. In such a case, when the lost design is stopped as a fixed stop design at the end of the first half of the super reach, the lost design that was temporarily stopped at the end of the first half of the super reach is changed again and the second half of the reach is executed. There is a case (may be configured such that the second half of the super reach production is executed without temporarily stopping the lost symbol at the end of the first half super reach production). Incidentally, the jackpot expectation is higher in the case where the symbol variation ends when the super reach second half production ends, than when the symbol variation ends when the super reach first half production ends. Returning to the description of the drawings, first, in a certain symbol variation, the first half super reach effect is started on the effect display device SG, and the button image is not displayed. After that, when the sub input button SB is pressed in a situation where the button image is not displayed, as a hidden button effect, a display that prompts the player to perform a continuous hit operation together with the button repeat hit effect (meter) (in this example, "shake hit!"). Is displayed) is displayed. Here, the gaming machine in the figure has an automatic continuous hitting function (the same configuration as the first modification from the present embodiment), but when the hidden button effect shown in the figure is executed, the game is played. Even if the player presses the sub input button SB for a long time, the automatic continuous stroke effect is not executed (the player needs to perform continuous continuous stroke operation). After that, when the player repeatedly hits the sub input button SB and the number of times the sub input button SB is pressed reaches a predetermined number, the meter becomes full. After that, when the sub input button SB has been pressed a predetermined number of times, the display of the meter is erased, a lever image is displayed, and a display prompting the player to operate the lever SB-3 (in this example, "lever Is displayed! ”Is displayed. After that, by operating the lever SB-3, a cut-in image is displayed on the effect display device SG, and a message indicating that super-reach is continued (super-reach second-half effect is executed) is displayed. After that, the production of the second half of Super Reach will be started. In the super reach second half effect, the hidden button effect for performing the repeated hit operation is not executed. Incidentally, as a configuration applicable to the hidden button effect in the figure, (1) the big hit expectation degree of the variation of the symbol being executed is different according to the effect result of the hidden button effect, (2) the effect result of the hidden button effect According to the above, the degree of expectation that the second half of the super reach effect will be executed is different.

Next, FIG. 78 is an image diagram of a hidden button effect applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. First, the super reach effect is started by a certain symbol variation, and the button image is not displayed. Next, when the sub-input button SB is pressed, a continuous hit button image (meter effect) is displayed as a hidden button effect and a display prompting the player to perform a continuous hit operation (in this example, "repeated hit!" Is displayed). Is displayed. Note that, like the configuration of FIG. 77, the gaming machine in the same figure has an automatic continuous hitting function, but in the execution variation of the hidden button effect, even if the player presses the sub input button SB for a long time, the automatic continuous hit effect is produced. Is not executed (the player has to perform continuous hit operation by himself). Next, the player repeatedly presses the sub input button SB, but the meter display is erased without the meter becoming full, and the failure effect is displayed on the effect display device SG (the meter has not become full. Is displayed) is displayed. In this example, when the continuous hit button effect (meter effect) of the hidden button effect fails (when the failure effect is executed), when the continuous button effect (meter effect) of the hidden button effect succeeds (cut-in effect) When it is executed), the jackpot expectation is lower. Although the second half of the super reach can be executed even if the continuous hit effect in the hidden button effect fails, the latter half of the super reach is easier to execute than the success in the continuous hit effect in the hidden button effect. There is. Incidentally, in FIGS. 77 and 78, a button repeated hitting effect (meter display) is generated as a hidden button effect, and it is configured to suggest the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol change being executed only by whether or not the meter is full. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the player repeatedly hits the sub input button SB, the display on the meter is increased step by step, and when the player repeatedly hits a predetermined number of times or the button effective period ends. It may be configured so as to suggest the big hit expectation degree (or the degree of expectation that the second half of the super reach is executed) of the fluctuation of the symbol being executed, depending on how much the meter indication in is increased. Or the expectation of execution in the latter half of super reach will be high). Further, the effect display is not limited to the increasing display mode, and for example, the effect is displayed as a continuous hit effect, and the color of the effect gradually changes each time the continuous hit operation is performed (“blue → yellow”). It may be configured to change to a color with a higher jackpot expectation, such as “→ green → red”).

  Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram of a hidden button effect applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. First, the super reach effect is started in a certain symbol variation, and the button image is not displayed. Next, when the sub input button SB is pressed, a continuous hit button image (meter effect) is displayed as a hidden button effect, and a display prompting the player to perform a continuous hit operation (in this example, "repeated hit!" Is displayed). Is displayed. Here, the gaming machine in the figure has an automatic continuous hitting function (the same configuration as the first modification from the present embodiment), and even when the hidden button effect shown in the figure is executed, the player Is configured such that the automatic continuous hit effect can be executed by long pressing the sub input button SB (the player may perform the continuous hit operation by himself). In the figure, the case where the player repeatedly operates the sub input button SB is described without parentheses, and the case where the player long presses the sub input button SB is described in parentheses. After that, when the continuous tapping operation (or long press) of the sub input button SB is started, a button image related to the single button press effect is displayed as the button effect while the meter is displayed, that is, during the continuous button effective period. Repeated button hits and single button presses are performed). After that, while the meter and the button image are displayed, the first cut-in effect is executed as the button single-shot effect by continuing the continuous hitting operation (or continuing to hold down the button) ( The button-striking effective period associated with streaking is continuing). After that, by continuing the continuous input operation of the sub input button SB (or by continuing to press and hold it), the meter display becomes full, and then the meter display is erased and the lever image is displayed. At the same time, a display for prompting the player to operate the lever SB-3 (in this example, "pull lever!") Is displayed. Next, by operating the lever SB-3, the second cut-in effect is displayed, and then the big hit symbol is stopped as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. In this way, in the figure, when the hidden button effect is executed, the button image is displayed during the display of the meter (during the button continuous hitting period), and the symbol change is made three times by one symbol change. The effect of operating the operation member (sub input button SB or lever SB-3) will be executed (the first button repeated hit effect and the second button single push effect are executed, and the third lever effect is It may be configured not to run). Further, in the figure, even in the execution variation of the hidden button effect, since the automatic continuous hitting function can be executed, the player long presses the sub input button SB in the symbol variation in which the hidden button effect is executed. If continued, it is configured such that the button repeated hit effect and the single button press effect are executed (as the meter increases, the cut-in effect related to the single button press is executed). You will be able to concentrate on the production.

Next, FIG. 80 is an image diagram of a hidden button effect applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. The upper part of the figure is a meter image displayed after the operation of the sub input button SB is executed a predetermined number of times or more during the button effective period when the hidden button effect is executed. The left side is the case where the meter display is lit up to one stage, the center display is the case where the meter display is lit up to four stages, and the right side display is lit up to seven stages (full tank). That is the case. After that, the sub input button SB has been operated a predetermined number of times or more, or the button repeated hit valid period has elapsed), the display of the meter is erased, the lever image is displayed, and the operation of the lever SB-3 is performed by the player. Is displayed (in this example, "pull the lever !!") is displayed.
After that, when the symbol variation ends, the decorative symbol stop symbol will be displayed, but the display of the meter when the operation of the sub-input button SB has been executed a predetermined number of times or more, or when the button continuous hit valid period has elapsed. (The maximum meter display in the fluctuation that does not increase even if you continue hitting more than this) The big hit expectation of the symbol fluctuation that is being executed, the meter ends in one stage (big hit expectation = large)> 7 steps of the meter ( It is configured so that it ends when it is full (big hit expectation = medium)> meter ends in 4 steps (big hit expectation = small). In this way, in the figure, when the hidden button effect is executed, when the symbol variation is executed, the operation of the sub-input button SB is executed a predetermined number of times or more, or the meter in the case where the button continuous hitting effective period has elapsed. The big hit expectation of the symbol fluctuation in execution by the display (the maximum meter display in the concerned fluctuation that does not increase even if the player continuously hits further) tends to be higher when there are more stages where the meter is increasing. (7 stages have higher jackpot expectation than 4 stages), but the highest jackpot expectation is 1 stage when the meter is increasing. In this way, basically, when performing a production in which the number of stages of the meter is increased by performing the continuous hitting operation, if the number of stages of the meter is not increased even if the continuous hitting operation is performed (unexpected development for the player. In this case, if the player feels uncomfortable, the jackpot expectation degree related to the symbol fluctuation becomes high, or it becomes definite that the symbol fluctuation becomes a jackpot (so-called premier effect). Good.

  Next, FIG. 81 is an image view of a customization guide screen applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. First, explaining from the upper left part of the figure, in the non-gaming state (non-gaming period), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, by operating the sub input button SB, the player as in the upper right part A selection screen (second customization guide screen) is displayed (setting items that can be set by the player are displayed. In this example, "automatic button operation setting", "light intensity adjustment function", "volume adjustment function" Can be displayed). While the player selection screen is displayed, the player can select the item to be set by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB-2, and by operating the sub input button SB, "automatic button operation setting" , "Light amount adjusting function" or "volume adjusting function" can be adjusted.

  When the "automatic button operation setting" is set by operating the sub input button SB, the automatic button operation setting screen is displayed as the above-mentioned customization execution screen as shown in the lower right stage, and the cross key SB- The left and right buttons of 2 can be used to select "ON" or "OFF" of the automatic button operation setting, and the operation of the sub-input button SB can determine "ON" or "OFF" of the automatic button operation setting. Has been done. Similarly, the light amount adjusting function, the volume adjusting function setting, etc. are displayed as the light amount adjusting screen and the volume adjusting screen, and the gaming machine can be customized. In the figure, the automatic button operation setting screen is displayed when the sub input button SB is operated while the standby demo screen is displayed or when the automatic button operation setting is selected on the player selection screen. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a menu screen in which an item whose setting is to be changed can be selected from a plurality of items. Production, production tendency, selection of hold prefetch production occurrence frequency, specific production execution frequency (especially, big jackpot expectation other than hold change production is relatively high. It may be configured such that it is possible to change the occurrence frequency of an effect that uses a body accessory. Further, when the execution frequency of a certain effect is increased, the jackpot expectation at the time of occurrence of the certain effect decreases, and when the execution frequency of a certain effect is decreased, the jackpot at the time of occurrence of the certain effect occurs. Expectations are designed to increase. The effect frequency may be adjusted so that a specific effect occurs only when the big hit is determined.

Next, in the lower left section, when the sub input button SB is operated while the standby demo screen is displayed, the automatic button operation setting screen is displayed as the customization in progress screen, and the automatic button operation setting is performed. Amusement machine customization is possible. In this way, when the sub input button SB is operated while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player selection screen is not displayed (without the player selection screen) and the customization execution screen is displayed. Is configured. Also, when the standby demo screen is displayed, the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, and the volume adjustment screen is displayed by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2. (The screen may not be displayed and only the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment may be performed). In this way, in the figure, the screen display control when the sub input button SB is operated is different between when the non-gaming decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and when the standby demo screen is displayed. Is configured. The configuration in which the screen display control is different when the sub input button SB is operated is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure, and the player can be operated by operating the sub input button SB when the standby demo screen is displayed. A configuration screen is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB when the selection screen (second customization guide screen) is displayed and the decorative pattern in the non-game is stopped and displayed. The screen display control when the sub-input button SB is operated may be different between when the non-playing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and when the standby demo screen is displayed.

  Next, FIG. 82 shows the number of types of effects to which the automatic continuous stroke effect applicable to this example (particularly, when the automatic continuous stroke effect is configured to be executable similarly to the first modification from the present embodiment) can be applied. This is an example. As shown in the figure, in this example, as a game state in which the automatic continuous hit effect can be executed, there are a non-time shortened game state, a time shortened game state, and a special game being executed. The three cases are compared with the case. In each state, the number of types of effects to which the automatic continuous hit effect can be applied (the number of types of automatic continuous hit effects that can be executed) is 4 in the non-time-reduced game state and 3 in the time-reduced game state. , There are two types when the special game is being executed, and there are more types in the non-time reduction game state than in the time reduction game state. Further, in each state, the number of types of effects to which the automatic continuous hit effect can be applied, in which the button continuous hit effective period of the automatic continuous hit effect is equal to or more than a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example), may be a non-time-reduced game state. There are one type, one type in the time shortening game state, and two types in the special game execution, and the number of types is the most in the special game. In addition, the automatic continuous hitting effect is successful (when the result or display mode that satisfies the specific condition is achieved by the automatic continuous hitting effect that is executed by pressing the sub input button SB for a long time, it is regarded as successful, and the sub input button SB is pressed for a long time. The number of types of auto continuous hit production that becomes definite that the symbol variation becomes a big hit when the result or the display mode does not satisfy the specific condition by the automatic continuous hit production performed is definite, There are one type when the game is in the time-reduced game state and two types when the game is in the time-reduced game state, and there are more types in the time-reduced game state than in the non-time-reduced game state. . In addition, in the case where the automatic continuous hitting effect during the special game is successful (successful when the result or the display mode satisfying the specific condition is achieved by the automatic continuous hitting effect executed by pressing the sub input button SB for a long time) , It becomes definite that the game state after the end of the special game becomes the probability variation game state {may be the time reduction game state (when the extension function is open)}. In the above example, there is a plurality of cut-in effects that can be executed after the expiration of the automatic continuous hit effect, and the plurality of cut-in effects are configured to be classified into success effects and failure effects, The example shows a case where the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol variation when the success effect is executed is configured to be higher than the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol fluctuation when the failure effect is performed. It should be noted that, as a result of the automatic continuous hit production, a final result (for example, the final display after being changed in accordance with the continuous hit operation and being changed in accordance with the continuous hit result) is obtained. The rate of appearance of a display notifying that the final result will be a big hit is higher in the time shortened gaming state than in the non-time shortened gaming state.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present example, the light amount adjustment is configured not to be prohibited from the viewpoint of epilepsy prevention (user-friendly viewpoint), but the light amount adjustment is performed as a process when a power failure occurs in such a configuration. The setting (light amount level before power-off) is temporarily stored, whereas the volume setting (volume level before power-off) may not be temporarily stored (both may be temporarily stored. ).

  Further, in the gaming machine according to this example, a plurality of effect display devices may be provided, such as a first effect display device SG and a second effect display device SG-2, and specifically, , The first effect display device SG plays the same role as in the present embodiment, the second effect display device SG-2 is configured to have a smaller display area than the first effect display device SG, and the first effect display device SG While the standby demonstration screen is displayed at, the volume level and the light amount level are constantly displayed on the second effect display device SG (there is no display because there is no hold), and during the symbol change, the second effect is displayed. The display device SG-2 may be configured to execute the hold display. The second effect display device SG-2 may be configured to be movable like the movable body accessory YK. It should be noted that what is displayed on the second effect display device SG-2 while the symbol is changing is not limited to the hold display, and may be displayed as a notice effect. Further, the display of the decorative design is always displayed on the first effect display device SG even when it is in the non-gaming state (except during the display of the standby demo screen), and the decorative effect on the second effect display device SG-2. The stop symbol (or the hold indicator) of the decorative symbol is not displayed even during the stop, but the volume level and the light amount level are displayed. That is, the display of the decorative design is displayed on the first effect display device SG so that the player can firmly recognize it in the non-gaming state, and the volume level is displayed on the second effect display device which does not display the decorative design. By displaying the light amount level, a display important for the progress of the game can be configured to be more easily visible, and the game machine can be user-friendly.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present example, as an element that can be changed by the player, the number of gaming balls displayed on the effect display device SG during the special game is a gaming ball paid out by winning the special winning opening. Change the number or the number of game balls shot by the player during the special game from the number of game balls paid out by winning the special winning opening, and change the number of game balls increased during the special game It may be configured as possible. Specifically, change on the customization screen, or during the big hit start, during the big hit, during the specific symbol fluctuation (for example, during the symbol fluctuation in the time shortening game state), the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB-2 It may be configured to be operable and changeable. In addition, the number of game balls displayed on the effect display device SG during the special game is set as the number of game balls paid out by winning the prize hole, or the game ball paid out by winning the prize hole. The number of game balls shot by the player during the special game may be subtracted from the number, and the number of game balls increased during the special game may be changed by the administrator (may be changed only by the administrator. , Both the player and the administrator may be changeable). Specifically, it may be configured to operate the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB-2 on the management menu screen to change.

Next, FIG. 83 is a game flow in the present embodiment. Here, a main game flow will be described. First, in the low probability and non-time saving (normal mode), a game machine ball is shot aiming at a ball entering the first main game starting opening A10 (left hit), and a game ball is placed at the first main game starting opening A10. The game by the first main game symbol is performed by entering the ball. When the first main game symbol is a big hit (first hit), it is a low probability and a short win (a big hit that will transition to a non-stochastic variation game state and a time shortening game state after the big hit) or a high probability It can be any of the big hits (the big hits that will shift to the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state after the big hit ends). During the big hit, the game ball is shot to the right side of the board (right hit), and the game ball is entered into the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20. When the big hit is over, it rushes into the mission after the big hit ends. The game state at this time is either low probability and time saving or high probability and time saving, and if the mission is successful, the probability change mode indicating that the probability is high and time saving is entered. On the other hand, if the mission is unsuccessful, the time saving ends, and the operation shifts to a latent mode with low probability and non-time saving or high probability and non-time saving. If the latent mode is changed to a big hit again, it becomes the same as that at the time of initial hit, and when the latent mode ends, the normal mode with low probability and untimely shortens. In the probability variation mode, the game ball is hit to the right to enter the game ball into the second main game starting opening B10, and the game is performed with the second main game symbol. It becomes a probability variation big hit (big hit with high probability) in the second main game symbol, and when the big hit ends, it becomes the probability variation mode again. On the other hand, when the non-probability variation big hit (big hit with low probability) in the second main game symbol, after the big hit ends, it shifts to a time saving mode with low probability and time saving. Here, when the time saving ends (100 times in this example), the mode shifts to the low probability and time saving normal mode, and again the first main game starting opening A10 is aimed at (left hitting), the first main game. A game will be played with the design.

(Summary)
As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can select the music during the big hit and the time saving, and the music determining method when selecting the music during the big hit is different from that during the time saving. Furthermore, the reproduction start point of the music when selecting the music is also different, and it is possible to provide a variety of operation modes even though the same music selection operation is performed. In addition, even a player who does not select a song can easily enjoy various songs by selecting "Random".

(Modification)
Here, a configuration that can be changed from the present embodiment will be described as a modified example.
(1) A certain number of times (for example, 20 times) in the probability variation mode may be set as a stage in which the average variation time is set to be short, and in this case, a dedicated BGM may be set so that music selection is not possible. In this case, it is possible to configure so that the music can be selected after the predetermined number of times has passed (here, 21 times or more).
(2) In a gaming machine (so-called ST machine) in which the probability change ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a variation mode table dedicated to the remaining 5 times is provided in order to perform a special effect during the remaining 5 times the probability change. It may be configured so as to be referred to, and at this time, the music selection may be disabled. In this case, when combined with (1), the probability changes 1 to 20 times: music selection is not possible, 21 to 95 times: music selection is possible, and 96 to 100 times: music selection is not possible.
(3) As a plurality of big hits, big hit A: 10 round big hits that can select songs, big hit B: big hits that cannot be selected before promotion, and can be selected after promotion, big hits C: big hits that cannot be selected It may be configured to have a 10-round jackpot.

(Second embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment, a small hit may not be provided, but it may be provided provisionally, but with that alone, a prize ball can be obtained by entering a big winning opening C10 during a special game related to a big hit. Being the main player, winning a prize ball through a small hit is just a bonus element. Therefore, a configuration in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained by a small hit is referred to as a second embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  84 is a table configuration diagram of the main game symbol lottery according to the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is the small hit probability, the big hit symbol in the second main game, and the variation mode (variation time) at the time of the small hit. First, the small hit probability in the second main game is 1004/1024, and the symbol fluctuation on the second main game side is configured to be a small hit with a high probability.

Next, for the big hit symbols, 5A and 7A on the first main game side and 5B on the second main game side are to be selected. Is configured to shift to a probability variation game state with a limited number of times (so-called ST). In the special game related to 5A and 5B, 2 rounds of big hits (not shown in particular, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the big winning opening C10 is shortly opened), and in the special game of 7A, 4 rounds. A big hit (not shown in particular, since the big winning opening C10 is opened for a long time, it is easy to enter a game ball) will be executed. It should be noted that, even if the big hit by any of the big hit symbols, it does not have to be a configuration that shifts to the probability variation game state with a limited number of times after the special game ends, like the present embodiment, the probability variation game state depending on the big hit symbol. The configuration may be different depending on whether or not to shift to.

  Further, in this example, after the special game related to 7A or 5B is finished, it is possible to shift to the time-reduced game state (in this example, in particular, the auxiliary game time reduction flag is turned on). This example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the case of a big hit on the second main game side, a time reduction game state (in this example, particularly, indicates a state where the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on). You may comprise so that the big hit which does not transfer to.

  Further, the variation time on the second main game side is configured such that a relatively short time is determined only during a probability variation game and a time reduction game (high probability and time reduction). For example, at the time of non-probability fluctuation game and non-time reduction game (low probability and non-time saving), or at probability fluctuation game and non-time reduction game (high probability and non-time saving), to the second main game side In the case of a small hit, the variation mode is determined from Bkx (75 seconds), Bky (85 seconds), and Bkz (95 seconds). In this case, the variation time is relatively long, and the variation time is randomly determined from the three patterns, so the game except the probability variation game and the time reduction game (high probability and time reduction) In the state, even if the player tries to win a prize ball by a small hit, the efficiency is low, and the game is executed on the first main game side. On the other hand, at the time of probability variation game and time reduction game (high probability and time reduction), if the second main game side is a small hit, the variation mode of Bk2 (1 second) is uniformly selected (also, The second main game has a high probability of winning a small hit). With such a table configuration, the player executes the game on the second main game side during the probability variation game and the time reduction game (high probability and time reduction), and efficiently wins the prize ball by the small hit game. It becomes possible to do it. In addition, even in the loss variation, at the time of non-probability fluctuation game and non-time reduction game (low probability and non-time saving), or probability fluctuation game and non-time reduction game (high probability and non-time saving), probability A variation mode in which the variation time is relatively longer than that in the variation game and the time reduction game (high probability and time reduction) is configured to be selected.

  Next, FIG. 85 is an image diagram of a music selection screen when a small hit occurs during the time saving. First, in the upper left diagram, a music selection screen during time saving is displayed. Next, when the figure shifts to the upper right, the decorative pattern stops at "AAA", indicating that a small hit has occurred. Even at this time, music selection is possible. Next, when moving to the lower diagram, the game ball entered the big winning opening (the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) opened by the small hit, so that one big winning opening “+15”, which indicates 15 balls, which is the number of prize balls when entering, is displayed in the approximate center of the liquid crystal screen. In addition, the total acquisition number display has also been updated. Even at this time, it is possible to select the music, and when the small hit ends, the next variation starts and the upper left drawing is returned to. That is, in the case of a small hit, it is possible to continuously select the music, and the selected music is also continuously output. However, in the case of outputting SE indicating that the player has entered the ball with displaying "+15" when entering the special winning opening, the volume of the music is lowered and the volume of the SE is emphasized (that is, the volume is , SE> music)) is preferable.

(Third Embodiment)
First, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment has a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter, inside the second special winning opening C20. Further, the game machine according to the third embodiment is configured such that a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, so that the game machine shifts to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game (so-called VST machine, Jade machine).

FIG. 86 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the combination of main game symbols that are a big hit is different, and that the configuration of each variation mode determination table is changed. In addition, among the main game symbols to be a big hit, the main game symbol in which the special game in which the game ball is easily inserted into the specific area C22 is executed is "5A / 7A / 3B / 5B / 7B", The main game symbol in which the special game in which the game ball is difficult to enter the specific area C22 is executed is "2A".

  Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 28 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1611 (third) and step 1850 (third), and the purpose is a sorting game (a unit for opening the second special winning opening C20 having a specific area C22). Game). That is, after setting the special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1608, or when the special game execution flag is on in step 1610, in step 1611 (third), CPUMC of the main control board M Determines whether or not the currently executed round is the distribution game execution round (the second round and the fourth round in this example). If Yes in step 1611 (third), in step 1850 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (third), the process moves to step 1612.

  Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1850 (third) of FIG. 87 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game in-execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process moves to step 1866. On the other hand, if No in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (the second special winning opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a jackpot pattern that opens for a time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 15 seconds and specifying as the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22). An opening pattern designed so that the entry into the area C22 is definite is set, and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the case of No in step 1854, in other words, when the stop symbol is 2A, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the short opening pattern as the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. -(For example, an opening pattern designed to make the non-entering ball into the specific area C22 definite when the opening is 0.1 seconds), and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the third embodiment, the long open symbol on the first main game side is "5A / 7A", and the ratio selected at the time of a big hit is "524/1024", and the second main game. The long open symbol on the side is "3B, 5B, 7B", and the ratio selected at the time of a big hit is "1024/1024", so the second main game side is larger than the big hit on the first main game side. The jackpot of is higher in the proportion of the second big winning opening C20 being long open in the distribution game execution round, that is, the game ball is easily inserted into the specific area C22 during the jackpot.

  Next, in step 1860, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 1864, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 in the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1866.

Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have been won in the second special winning opening C20. .. If Yes in step 1866, the process moves to step 1870. On the other hand, if No in step 1866, in step 1868, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1868, the process moves to step 1870. Next, in step 1870, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1872, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game in-execution flag. Next, in step 1874, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a game ball entering the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1874, in step 1876, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation shift reservation flag and shifts to step 1878. Even if No in step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, in step 1878, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the distribution game execution round), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1634). Even if No in step 1868, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1634).

  Next, FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 of FIG. 87 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1680 (third), step 1682 (third), step 1653 (third), step 1684 (third) and step 1686 (third), and The purpose is, in the distribution game executed in the third embodiment, depending on whether or not there is a ball into the specific area C22, whether or not it is possible to shift to the probability variation game state and the upper limit value of the number of variations in the time reduction game state is different. It is to let. That is, when executing this subroutine, in step 1680 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability variation shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1680 (third), in step 1682 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation shift reservation flag. Next, in step 1653 (third) and step 1654, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a certain number of times (80 times in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c and turns on the main game probability variation flag. . Next, in step 1684 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the limited frequency counter MN52c a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example). Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658, and thereafter in steps 1658 and 1660. The same processing as this embodiment is executed.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1680 (third), in step 1686 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M causes the time saving counter MP52c to have a predetermined number B (in this example, 50 times, but Is not limited. A value equal to or less than the predetermined number of times A is preferable.), And the process proceeds to step 1658.

Here, in the third embodiment, irrespective of whether or not the player has entered the specific area C22 during the special game, it is configured to shift to the time reduction game state after the special game ends. In addition, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of fluctuations in the time shortening game state after the special game is the same as the predetermined number of times A in the probability fluctuation game state. (80 times in this example), and when the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of fluctuations in the time-reduced game state after the special game is different from the predetermined number A ( It is configured to be a predetermined number of times B (50 times in this example), which is a small number. As a result, even if the player does not pass through the specific area C22 during a special game in which it is easy to enter the specific area C22, it is possible to provide a certain advantageous period and not pass through the specific area C22. It can be expected that deteriorating the interest of the people will be suppressed. In addition, the variation mode of the main game symbol in the time shortening game state, in the time shortening game state of a predetermined number of times A, there are three stages of limited frequency tables (limited frequency table 1, limited frequency table 2 and limited frequency table 3). The main game table 3-2 is referred to in the time shortened game state of a predetermined number of times B, and the table of different effect contents is also referred to. In addition, the structure is applied to the case where the big hit symbols that trigger the execution of the special game are the same or different (for example, even if the special game is triggered by the same big hit symbol, the special game is executed). The number of times saved depends on whether or not the player enters the specific area C22). In addition, this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit number of fluctuations in the time reduction game may be determined based on the symbol at the time of a big hit (for example, during a special game). When the ball is not entered into the specific area C22, the maximum number of fluctuations of the time-reducing game is determined by the big hit symbol, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 90 is a time chart showing the volume of BGM during the big hit in the third embodiment. First, at the timing of (1), a V entry round (a round that fuels whether or not a game ball enters the specific area C22) provided in a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round) during a big hit is started. . At this time, the BGM volume gradually decreases from the start of the round. Next, at the timing of (2), the player enters the specific area C22 (V), and SE indicating that the player has entered is output. At this time, the volume of SE indicating that the player has entered the specific area C22 (V) is configured to be higher than the volume of BGM. When the output of SE indicating that the player has entered the specific area C22 (V) is finished, the volume of BGM gradually increases and becomes the same as the volume before the start of the V-ball entering round. Next, at the timing of (3), it is the jackpot end demonstration time. At the big hit end demo time, the BGM volume is getting a little low. Next, at the timing of (4), at the fluctuation start timing, the volume is further reduced. That is, when the same music is output during the big hit and during the shortening of the working hours, the volume of the music is “Rounding> Big hit end demo> Fluctuating”. Also, the volume at the start of the first hour / hour reduction is the same as the volume during the jackpot end demonstration, and the volume at the start of the first hour / hour reduction is different from that at the start of the second hour / hour reduction. > At the start of the second speed reduction.)

  In addition, at the time of the big hit end demonstration time at the time of the first hit, the manufacturer logo is displayed and the card discharge caution is displayed, and at the big hit end demonstration time at the time of the first hit, the BGM volume is reduced. In the big hit after the first time, the volume of BGM (song) may not be reduced. Here, the volume of voice (SE, etc.) that can be output at the same time as the volume of BGM (musical piece) is summarized as follows: (2) The volume of SE when entering the specific area C22 (V) is larger than the volume of BGM (music) during the big hit, (3) When an error occurs during the big hit (For example, power restoration, door opening error, magnetic detection error, radio wave detection error, bowl full error, etc.), the volume of voice (BGM, etc.) other than the error sound is zero. Alternatively, the volume of the error sound can be configured to be higher than the volume of sounds other than the error sound.

(Fourth Embodiment)
Next, FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a usage example of the button image. When the player can operate the sub input button SB, the sub input button SB can be operated by displaying the button image (display of operation member) and the indicator image (display of gauge) as one image on the liquid crystal. It suggests. If the button image (operation member display) and the indicator image (gauge display) are stored as separate images, it is necessary to perform control to display two images each time, and the capacity of the image ROM that stores the images is compressed. In addition, the processing load will increase. Therefore, it is possible to solve these problems by storing the button image (display of the operation member) and the indicator image (display of the gauge) as one image. As a specific example of use, as shown in (a) Display other than during big hit, when the sub input button SB can be operated only once, the gauge is reduced in the indicator portion according to the effective period. By performing image processing so that the player is informed that the effective period has decreased, the sub input button SB is repeatedly displayed during the big hit as shown in (b) display during big hit. When it is possible to perform the button operation (the buttons can be repeatedly hit), one image composed of the button (operation member display) and the indicator (gauge display) is displayed, and the image processing is performed so that the gauge decreases. Therefore, in either case of (a) and (b), it is possible to use one common image (an image composed of the operation member display and the gauge display). It should be noted that these are just examples, and it is possible to display the image of (b) and suggest that the sub input button SB can be repeatedly hit even during a big hit, and (a) during a big hit. As described above, it may be indicated that the sub input button SB can be operated only once. Further, when the sub input button SB can be repeatedly hit, the effective period may be indicated as shown in (a) in order to indicate the entire effective period. Further, in the display other than during the big hit (for example, in the normal state), five types of button colors are provided in the order of high expectation for the big hit: iridescent>gold>red>green> blue. In the big hit display, only two types of red> blue may be provided in descending order of probability of probability change and expectation of round promotion. The example of using the button image of (b) is particularly effective when the effective period of the button is set at the end of a specific round (for example, at the end of two rounds).

Moreover, the following configurations are also possible.
(1) The indicator (gauge display) memory may display 0.
(2) The present invention is not limited to an effect in which the sub input button SB can be repeatedly hit, but is also applied to an effect that allows the player to select using the sub input button SB (for example, the character switches each time the button is pressed, etc.). Good.
(3) Not limited to the indicator (gauge display), a countdown display by numbers or the like may be used. When this configuration is applied to (b), it is desirable to always display the maximum countdown value or always display the minimum countdown value.
(4) If the same image composed of buttons (operation member display) and indicators (gauge display) is used in (a) and (b), the display mode (color, size, blinking) of one button is assumed. , Etc.) may be different.

  In addition, in this example, the configuration of the pachinko game machine is illustrated, but the invention is not limited to this, and the volume level, the light amount level, or the automatic button operation is turned on in the rotating body type game machine. The configuration for enabling the off state may be applied, or the configuration for the effect mode using the sub input button SB, the cross key SB-2, and the lever SB-3 described above may be applied. Here, a supplementary description will be given of the well-known spinning type game machine.

  First, on a well-known spinner type gaming machine, a main board as a main game control section that controls the progress of the game, a sub board as a sub game control section that controls the execution of the production, and main game identification information are displayed. As a main game identification information display section, a plurality of rows (generally three rows) of reels each having a plurality of pieces of identification information arranged on the outer periphery, and a main game start that can be operated by the player and instruct to start the game It has a start lever as an instruction device, and a stop button as a main game progress instruction device that can be operated by the player and instruct the progress of the game. Then, on the main board, a main game random number acquisition unit that acquires a main game random number when the start lever is operated, and one or more stop identifications based on the random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition unit. Main game identification information display content deciding means for tentatively determining information (for example, display content deciding means for internally determining a winning combination such as a small win or special bonus), and main game identification information display content deciding Based on one or a plurality of stop identification information provisionally determined by the means and the operation timing of the stop button, the main control for displaying one stop identification information on the reel which is the main game identification information display unit Gaming identification information display control means (for example, reel control means for stopping the reel at a predetermined position based on the internally determined winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed), When a predetermined mode is displayed as stop identification information on the reel that is the game identification information display unit, special game execution control means (for example, "777 etc.") that controls to shift to the special game is on a predetermined effective line. The special game object operating means for activating the special game object) and the information about the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means is transmitted to the sub game control section side. And transmission control means.

  On the side of the sub game control section in the spinning type gaming machine having such a well-known configuration, the sub input buttons (sub input button SB, cross key SB-2, lever SB-3 of this embodiment are collectively referred to as sub input buttons. It is possible to apply a configuration related to the effect of operating (sometimes called). Specifically, a configuration in which the automatic continuous hit effect is executed when the sub input button is continuously pressed, when the pressing of the sub input button is started during the automatic continuous hit acceptance period and the pressing of the sub input button is maintained, Operation of the sub-input button that is executed when the player operates the sub-input button such as the button continuous-stroke effect even if the player does not operate the sub-input button. The configuration that can be executed without performing the above, the configuration that can execute the hidden button effect, and the like can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine. In addition, when applied to a rotating type gaming machine, a bet button {mechanism for enabling the input of the bet number (bet number)} is configured to have the same role as the sub input button. The mechanism may be configured to have multiple uses.

  Incidentally, the respective embodiments and the configurations described in the present specification may be combined respectively. For example, by combining the present embodiment and the second embodiment, a small hit frequently occurs on the second main game side. Further, it is possible to provide a game machine in which music can be selected, and by combining the present embodiment and the third embodiment, it is possible to provide a VST machine and a game machine in which music can be selected.

M main control board,
MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 1st main gaming timer, MP11t-C2 2nd main gaming timer MP22t-B 2nd main game Starting port Electric accessory release timer, MP33c Prize winning ball counter MP34t Special game timer, MP52c Time saving counter A First main game peripheral device A10 First main game start port (first main game start port A), A11s First main Game starting mouth ball entrance detection device A20 first main game symbol display device, A21g first main game symbol display portion A21h first main game symbol hold display portion, B second main gaming peripheral device B10 second main game starting opening, B11s 2nd main game starting entrance ball detection device B11d 2nd main game starting mouth electric accessory, B20 2nd main game symbol display device B21g 2nd main game symbol display section B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display section C 1st and 2nd main game common peripheral equipment, C10 1st big winning a prize mouth C11s 1st big winning a prize winning detection device, C11d 1st big winning a prize electric prize C20 2nd large Winning prize, C21s 2nd prize winning prize winning detection device C21d 2nd prize winning electric prize, YK movable body accessory H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game starting port H11s auxiliary game starting port ball detection device, H20 auxiliary Game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S Sub control board, SM Production display control means (sub main control board)
SM21t Package time management timer,
SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SG effect display device SG10 display area, SG11 decorative design display area SG12 first hold display section, SG13 second hold display section SB sub-input button, SB-2 cross key SB-3 lever , HY10t non-game period measurement timer ME10t error state holding period timer, D26 game effect lamp D70 power saving mode display lamp, D42 launch handle KH prize ball payout control board KE prize ball payout device, MT10 command sending buffer

Claims (2)

A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
An effect display device that displays a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game,
With an operation member operable by the player,
The winning / unwinning lottery is executed based on entering the first starting mouth or the second starting mouth, and having a special game executed by winning the winning / unwinning lottery,
It is possible to display an operation suggestion image indicating that the operation member has a valid operation period on the effect display device,
The operation suggestion image is composed of an operation unit display and an effective period display,
The operation suggestion image can be displayed at both the first timing and the second timing,
At the first timing when the operation suggestion image can be displayed,
When the operation member is operated while the operation suggestion image is being displayed, the operation suggestion image is ended and a new effect display is performed.
The display mode of the effective period display is controlled to change while the operation suggestion image is displayed,
At the second timing when the operation suggestion image can be displayed,
The display mode of the effective period display does not change while the operation suggestion image is displayed,
A game machine characterized in that the operation member can be operated a plurality of times while the operation suggestion image is being displayed, and the effect display can be executed based on the operation of the operation member while the operation suggestion image is being displayed. . The first timing is a case where the special game is not being executed,
At the second timing, a special game is being executed,
With the type of operation suggestion image that can be displayed when the special game is not being executed and the type of operation suggestion image that can be displayed while the special game is being executed, the type of operation suggestion image that can be displayed when the special game is not being executed The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured so as to have a larger number of.

Images